1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
145 \tracking_changes true
146 \output_changes false
150 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 by the \SpecialChar LyX
166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
168 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
169 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
170 Documentation mailing list:
171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
173 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
185 \begin_inset Newline newline
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 \begin_inset Note Note
196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
197 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
211 \begin_layout Standard
212 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
213 LatexCommand tableofcontents
220 \begin_layout Chapter
224 \begin_layout Section
225 What is \SpecialChar LyX
229 \begin_layout Standard
231 is a document preparation system.
232 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
233 scripts, publishable books, business
234 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
235 It is unlike most other
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
245 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 pt type, left justified, 5
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
275 \begin_layout Standard
276 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
281 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
285 \begin_layout Standard
290 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
291 's philosophy: most importantly,
292 the format of all of the manuals.
293 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
294 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
300 manual describes that, too.
303 \begin_layout Section
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
310 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
312 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
313 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
319 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
320 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
322 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
323 only a vertical scrollbar.
324 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
325 The first case is large images.
326 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
327 image and use the option
338 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
341 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
342 this doesn't work for equations yet.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
347 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
355 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
362 \begin_layout Section
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
369 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
371 Just select the manual you want to read from the
378 \begin_layout Section
379 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
392 can be configured via the menu
394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
398 \begin_inset Index idx
401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 packages are available.
412 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
414 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
416 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
421 \begin_inset space \space{}
424 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
427 To force \SpecialChar LyX
428 to re-inspect your system, you should use
430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
444 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
445 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
448 \begin_layout Section
451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
453 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
460 \begin_layout Standard
461 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
462 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
463 installed, but you will not be
464 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
465 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
466 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
467 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
468 document can always be output as plain text
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 or DocBook classes or packages.
475 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
476 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
482 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
485 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
494 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
501 \begin_inset Index idx
504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
505 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
513 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
524 \begin_layout Chapter
525 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
529 \begin_layout Section
530 Basic File Operations
531 \begin_inset Index idx
534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
543 \begin_layout Standard
548 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
549 in addition to some more advanced operations:
552 \begin_layout Itemize
574 \begin_layout Itemize
590 arg "buffer-new-template"
596 \begin_layout Itemize
618 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
630 \begin_layout Itemize
632 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
644 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
660 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
670 \begin_layout Itemize
692 \begin_layout Itemize
704 arg "buffer-write-as"
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
730 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \begin_layout Itemize
758 \begin_layout Standard
759 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
760 a few minor differences.
763 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
774 command lists the available templates.
775 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
776 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
777 and possibly propose text fragments
779 for the document, features
780 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
783 you would otherwise need to
784 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
786 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
790 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
794 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
802 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
808 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
809 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
813 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
821 \begin_layout Standard
822 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
854 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
855 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
856 is just that — a big, blank space.
864 \begin_layout Standard
885 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
890 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
893 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
911 will reload the document from disk.
912 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
913 and want to restore it to the last save.
922 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
923 them as your changes.
926 \begin_layout Section
927 Basic Editing Features
928 \begin_inset Index idx
931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
940 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
947 \begin_layout Standard
948 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
949 can perform cut and paste operations
950 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
951 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
952 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
953 editing features and how to access
955 We will start with cut and paste.
958 \begin_layout Standard
959 As you might expect, the
963 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
964 various other editing features.
965 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
969 \begin_layout Itemize
975 \begin_inset Index idx
978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1007 \begin_layout Itemize
1013 \begin_inset Index idx
1016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1045 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset Index idx
1054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1079 \begin_layout Itemize
1083 \begin_inset space ~
1089 \begin_layout Itemize
1093 \begin_inset space ~
1099 \begin_layout Itemize
1103 \begin_inset space ~
1107 \begin_inset space ~
1113 \begin_inset Index idx
1116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1125 \begin_inset Index idx
1128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1143 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1153 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1159 \begin_layout Standard
1160 The first three are self-explanatory.
1161 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1162 and other programs by
1183 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1184 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1189 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1190 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1191 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1192 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1193 into individual cells.
1197 \begin_inset space ~
1202 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1203 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1207 \begin_layout Standard
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1216 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1218 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1233 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1234 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1235 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1241 \begin_inset space \space{}
1244 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1245 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1251 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1270 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1271 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1273 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1277 \begin_inset space ~
1282 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1283 start a new paragraph.
1284 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1285 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1293 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1307 \begin_inset space ~
1310 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1313 paste from the primary selection.
1314 This is normally the currently selected text.
1317 \begin_layout Standard
1320 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1322 \begin_inset space ~
1326 \begin_inset space ~
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1338 \begin_inset space ~
1344 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1350 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1353 \begin_inset space ~
1362 \begin_inset space ~
1367 button to skip the current word.
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1376 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1380 \begin_inset space ~
1385 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1387 If the toggle is set, searching for
1388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1399 will not match the word
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1414 Match whole words only
1416 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1417 to only find complete words, e.
1418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1447 offers also an advanced
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1459 feature that is described in section
1460 \begin_inset space ~
1464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1466 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1473 \begin_layout Standard
1474 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1475 \begin_inset space \space{}
1479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1487 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1489 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1494 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1501 \begin_layout Standard
1505 arg "inset-select-all"
1508 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1509 When the cursor is inside an inset
1512 arg "inset-select-all"
1515 selects the content of the inset.
1519 arg "inset-select-all"
1522 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1527 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1530 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1534 \begin_layout Section
1536 \begin_inset Index idx
1539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1546 \begin_inset Index idx
1549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1558 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1565 \begin_layout Standard
1566 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1568 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1571 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1574 or the toolbar button
1580 to undo some mistake.
1581 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1583 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1586 or the toolbar button
1593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1600 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1604 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1607 \begin_layout Standard
1608 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1617 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1618 This is a consequence of the 100
1619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1622 step undo limit mentioned above.
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1634 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1636 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1640 \begin_layout Section
1642 \begin_inset Index idx
1645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1654 \begin_layout Standard
1655 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1658 \begin_layout Enumerate
1663 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 once anywhere in the edit window.
1669 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1673 \begin_layout Enumerate
1678 \begin_layout Itemize
1685 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1688 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1692 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1695 \begin_layout Itemize
1696 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1706 \begin_layout Enumerate
1707 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1711 \begin_layout Standard
1712 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1713 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1717 \begin_layout Section
1719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1721 name "sec:Navigating"
1726 \begin_inset Index idx
1729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1738 \begin_layout Standard
1740 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1743 \begin_layout Itemize
1748 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1749 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1752 \begin_layout Itemize
1753 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1755 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1757 \begin_inset space ~
1762 or by the toolbar button
1765 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1771 \begin_layout Itemize
1772 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1774 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1777 and use the same menu to return to them.
1778 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1781 \begin_layout Standard
1785 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1790 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1791 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1793 \begin_inset space ~
1798 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1799 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1800 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1801 your last editing position.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1813 \begin_layout Subsection
1815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1817 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1822 \begin_inset Index idx
1825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1826 Navigating ! Outline
1832 \begin_inset Index idx
1835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1844 \begin_layout Standard
1845 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1846 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1847 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1855 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1859 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1866 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1871 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1876 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1877 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1878 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1879 dialog and to modify the citation.
1882 \begin_layout Standard
1887 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1888 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1890 Labels and References
1892 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1901 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1904 \begin_layout Standard
1905 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1906 you further to control the display.
1911 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1912 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1918 option keeps it in the current view state.
1919 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1923 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1924 \begin_inset space ~
1927 3, the subsections of sections
1928 \begin_inset space ~
1931 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1936 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1941 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1951 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1954 \begin_layout Standard
1961 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1962 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1976 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1977 So, for example, you can move section
1978 \begin_inset space ~
1982 \begin_inset space ~
1985 2.4 or after section
1986 \begin_inset space ~
1991 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2004 (or the corresponding key bindings
2012 ) you can change the level of sections.
2013 So you can for example make section
2014 \begin_inset space ~
2018 \begin_inset space ~
2022 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_layout Standard
2029 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2030 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2033 \begin_layout Subsection
2034 Horizontal Scrolling
2035 \begin_inset Index idx
2038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2039 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2047 \begin_layout Standard
2049 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2055 \begin_inset space \space{}
2059 \begin_inset space ~
2062 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2063 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2064 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2068 \begin_layout Standard
2069 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2073 \begin_layout Itemize
2075 is used on a small tablet computer
2078 \begin_layout Itemize
2079 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2091 \begin_inset space ~
2104 \begin_layout Itemize
2105 Math constructs with long command names
2108 \begin_layout Standard
2109 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2110 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2112 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2113 windows so that table
2114 \begin_inset space ~
2118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2120 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2125 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2127 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2128 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2131 \begin_layout Standard
2132 \begin_inset Float table
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2140 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2145 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2149 Horizontal scrolling test.
2157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2159 \begin_inset Tabular
2160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2161 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2206 \begin_layout Section
2207 Input/Word Completion
2208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2210 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2215 \begin_inset Index idx
2218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2225 \begin_inset Index idx
2228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2259 \begin_layout Standard
2261 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2263 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2264 is used to propose completions.
2267 \begin_layout Standard
2268 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2271 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2276 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2283 \begin_inset space ~
2287 \begin_inset space ~
2292 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2296 \begin_inset space ~
2301 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2302 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2306 \begin_inset space ~
2312 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2313 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2314 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2315 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2318 \begin_layout Standard
2320 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2321 completions available.
2326 key to accept a proposed completion.
2327 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2328 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2329 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2336 \begin_layout Standard
2337 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2338 ing options for text.
2339 The special math option
2343 enables characters to be composed.
2344 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2345 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2348 , you can then input the characters
2349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2360 to a formula to get it.
2361 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2362 of the math toolbar.
2363 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2367 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2368 's installation folder.
2369 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2378 \begin_layout Section
2380 \begin_inset Index idx
2383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2390 \begin_inset Index idx
2393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2422 \begin_inset Index idx
2425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2456 \begin_layout Standard
2457 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2471 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2474 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2478 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2479 \begin_inset space ~
2483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2485 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2492 \begin_layout Standard
2496 \begin_inset space ~
2504 \begin_inset space ~
2525 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2529 \begin_layout Labeling
2530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2534 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2535 LatexCommand nomenclature
2537 description "Tabulator key"
2544 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2546 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2547 \begin_inset space ~
2551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2553 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2560 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2564 , especially section
2565 \begin_inset space ~
2569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2571 reference "subsec:Lists"
2577 If you are still confused, look in the
2582 \begin_inset Newline newline
2590 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2591 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2595 \begin_layout Labeling
2596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2600 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2601 LatexCommand nomenclature
2603 description "Escape key"
2611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2618 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2619 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2622 \begin_layout Labeling
2623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2629 \begin_inset space ~
2633 \begin_inset space ~
2640 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2641 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2645 \begin_layout Standard
2646 There are three modifier keys:
2649 \begin_layout Labeling
2650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2668 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2669 LatexCommand nomenclature
2671 description "Control key"
2676 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2677 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2681 \begin_layout Itemize
2690 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2693 \begin_layout Itemize
2702 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2705 \begin_layout Itemize
2714 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2718 \begin_layout Labeling
2719 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2737 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2738 LatexCommand nomenclature
2740 description "Shift key"
2745 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2746 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2749 \begin_layout Labeling
2750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2768 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2769 LatexCommand nomenclature
2771 description "Alt or Meta key"
2776 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2777 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2778 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2784 \begin_inset Newline newline
2787 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2789 menu accelerator keys
2792 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2793 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2797 \begin_layout Standard
2798 For example, the sequence
2799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2805 \begin_inset space ~
2809 \begin_inset space ~
2815 \begin_inset space ~
2823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2842 \begin_inset space ~
2848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2858 \begin_layout Standard
2863 manual lists all other things bound to the
2871 \begin_layout Standard
2872 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2874 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2875 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2876 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2877 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2878 The \SpecialChar LyX
2879 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2880 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2881 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2883 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2899 followed by a capital
2906 \begin_layout Chapter
2909 \begin_inset Index idx
2912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 \begin_layout Section
2924 \begin_inset Index idx
2927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2936 \begin_layout Subsection
2940 \begin_layout Standard
2941 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2942 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2943 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2944 numbering schemes, and so on.
2945 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2946 and format the title of your document differently.
2949 \begin_layout Standard
2954 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2955 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2956 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2957 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2958 picks one for you by default.
2959 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2962 \begin_layout Subsection
2964 \begin_inset Index idx
2967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2976 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2983 \begin_layout Standard
2984 You can select a class using the
2986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2991 \begin_inset Index idx
2994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3001 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3009 \begin_layout Standard
3010 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3015 \begin_layout Description
3016 Article for basic articles
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Report for basic reports
3023 \begin_layout Description
3024 Book for writing a book
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 Letter for US-style letters
3031 \begin_layout Standard
3032 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3033 only uses if you have installed
3034 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3035 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3036 distributions will include
3038 Here are some of the classes.
3039 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3041 Special Document Classes
3050 \begin_layout Description
3051 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3054 \begin_layout Description
3055 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3064 \begin_layout Description
3065 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3066 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3067 There are three article layouts available.
3068 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3069 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3070 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3071 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3076 sequential numbering
3077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3080 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3081 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3082 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3083 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Beamer Layout for presentations
3090 \begin_layout Description
3091 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3092 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3093 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3094 with \SpecialChar LyX
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3102 \begin_layout Description
3104 \begin_inset space ~
3107 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3110 \begin_layout Description
3111 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3114 \begin_layout Description
3115 Foils Used to make transparencies
3118 \begin_layout Description
3119 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3120 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3121 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3122 with \SpecialChar LyX
3126 \begin_layout Description
3127 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3128 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3131 \begin_layout Description
3132 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3135 \begin_layout Description
3136 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3139 \begin_layout Description
3140 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3141 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3142 (Is used by this document.)
3145 \begin_layout Description
3146 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3149 \begin_layout Description
3150 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3153 \begin_layout Description
3158 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3159 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3161 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3165 \begin_layout Description
3166 Slides Used to make transparencies
3169 \begin_layout Description
3171 \begin_inset space ~
3174 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3175 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3178 \begin_layout Description
3179 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3182 \begin_layout Standard
3183 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3185 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3187 Special Document Classes
3194 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3195 of the document classes.
3198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3202 \begin_layout Standard
3203 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3205 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3206 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3208 \begin_inset Index idx
3211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3228 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3229 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3231 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3234 \begin_layout Standard
3237 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3242 , are highly specialized.
3244 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3245 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3246 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3247 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3248 by some document class.
3249 There are just too many of them.
3250 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3253 \begin_layout Standard
3254 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3262 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3263 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3264 document class for a new file.
3266 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3269 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3276 manual for information on how to install them.
3277 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3283 \begin_layout Standard
3284 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3285 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3286 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3287 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 class files to be used for dissertation
3289 s submitted to those universities.
3290 The \SpecialChar LyX
3291 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3293 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3297 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3303 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3310 name "subsec:Modules"
3315 \begin_inset Index idx
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3327 \begin_layout Standard
3328 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3329 chosen document class.
3330 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3331 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3352 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3356 \begin_layout Standard
3357 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 packages or file format converters that are not always
3359 installed by default.
3361 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3362 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3363 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3364 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3366 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3367 file without the missing prerequisites.
3368 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3369 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3372 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3376 \begin_inset Index idx
3379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3386 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3391 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3394 \begin_layout Standard
3395 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3403 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3405 will advise you about these things.
3413 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3417 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3422 \begin_inset Index idx
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3426 Document ! Local Layout
3434 \begin_layout Standard
3435 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3436 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3437 : They are intended to be used in
3438 a variety of different documents.
3439 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3440 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3441 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3442 need a specific inset or
3443 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3445 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3448 style only that one time.
3449 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3451 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3469 manual for information on how to use it.
3472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3476 \begin_layout Standard
3477 Each class has a default set of options.
3478 Here's a quick table describing them:
3481 \begin_layout Standard
3482 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3488 \begin_layout Standard
3490 \begin_inset Tabular
3491 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3492 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3493 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3494 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3496 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3497 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 \begin_layout Standard
3952 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3958 \begin_layout Standard
3959 You're probably also wondering what
3960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3964 \begin_inset space ~
3968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3972 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3973 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3978 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3983 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3993 headings, there are also
4001 headings, and so on.
4002 We will describe these headings fully in section
4003 \begin_inset space ~
4007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4009 reference "subsec:Headings"
4016 \begin_layout Subsection
4018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4020 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4025 \begin_inset Index idx
4028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4035 \begin_inset Index idx
4038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4047 \begin_layout Standard
4048 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4057 \begin_inset space ~
4065 \begin_inset space ~
4070 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4072 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4073 doesn't support special options you want to
4074 use for your document.
4075 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4076 -class and its options, you have to read
4080 \begin_layout Standard
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4091 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4097 \begin_inset space ~
4102 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4103 You can choose between the following five options:
4106 \begin_layout Labeling
4107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4112 Use default page style of current class.
4115 \begin_layout Labeling
4116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4121 No page numbers or headings.
4124 \begin_layout Labeling
4125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4133 \begin_layout Labeling
4134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4139 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4140 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4141 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4142 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4145 \begin_layout Labeling
4146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4151 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4152 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4158 \begin_inset Index idx
4161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4169 How they are defined is explained in section
4170 \begin_inset space ~
4174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4176 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4183 \begin_layout Standard
4184 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4185 \begin_inset space ~
4189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4191 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4198 \begin_layout Subsection
4199 Paper Size and Orientation
4200 \begin_inset Index idx
4203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4204 Document ! Paper size
4210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4212 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4219 \begin_layout Standard
4220 You can find the following options in the menu
4223 \begin_inset space ~
4230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4234 \begin_inset Index idx
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4246 \begin_layout Labeling
4247 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4251 \begin_inset space ~
4256 What size paper to print on.
4261 \begin_layout Itemize
4267 \begin_layout Itemize
4273 \begin_layout Itemize
4279 \begin_layout Itemize
4285 \begin_layout Itemize
4288 US letter, US legal, US executive
4291 \begin_layout Itemize
4297 \begin_layout Itemize
4304 \begin_layout Labeling
4305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4310 To choose whether to output as
4321 \begin_layout Labeling
4322 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4326 \begin_inset space ~
4331 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4332 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4335 \begin_layout Subsection
4337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4339 name "subsec:Margins"
4344 \begin_inset Index idx
4347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4354 \begin_inset Index idx
4357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4366 \begin_layout Standard
4367 Paper margins are set in the menu
4369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset Index idx
4376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4385 \begin_layout Standard
4386 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4387 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4388 the paper format and the font size into account.
4391 \begin_layout Subsection
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4396 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4402 That includes the paragraph environments.
4403 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4404 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4405 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4407 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4416 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4418 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4419 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4420 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4423 \begin_layout Section
4424 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4425 \begin_inset Index idx
4428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4429 Paragraph ! Indentation
4437 \begin_layout Subsection
4439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4441 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4448 \begin_layout Standard
4449 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4450 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4453 \begin_layout Standard
4454 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4455 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4456 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4457 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4461 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4467 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4468 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4469 language than English.
4471 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4474 \begin_layout Standard
4475 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4476 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4477 into \SpecialChar LyX
4479 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4482 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4484 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4485 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4486 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4493 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4494 goes to produce a printable file.
4499 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4501 gives you the ability globally to change
4505 these pre-coded spacings.
4506 We will explain more later.
4509 \begin_layout Subsection
4510 Paragraph Separation
4511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4513 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4518 \begin_inset Index idx
4521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4522 Paragraph ! Separation
4530 \begin_layout Standard
4538 \begin_inset space ~
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4557 \begin_inset Index idx
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4566 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4569 \begin_layout Subsection
4573 \begin_layout Standard
4574 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4579 \begin_inset space ~
4584 dialog and toggle the
4587 \begin_inset space ~
4592 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4595 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4599 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4600 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4604 \begin_layout Standard
4605 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4606 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4609 \begin_layout Subsection
4611 \begin_inset Index idx
4614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4615 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4623 \begin_layout Standard
4626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4630 \begin_inset Index idx
4633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4642 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4646 \begin_inset space ~
4655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4656 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4662 \begin_inset Index idx
4665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4672 installed to use this feature.
4677 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4679 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4681 \begin_inset space ~
4686 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4687 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4690 \begin_layout Section
4691 Paragraph Environments
4692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4694 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4699 \begin_inset Index idx
4702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4703 Paragraph ! Environments
4709 \begin_inset Index idx
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4713 Paragraph environments|(
4721 \begin_layout Subsection
4725 \begin_layout Standard
4726 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4729 \begin_layout Standard
4738 } \SpecialChar ldots
4748 \begin_inset Newline newline
4751 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4753 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4754 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4755 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4764 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4767 \begin_layout Standard
4768 A paragraph environment is simply a
4769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4776 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4777 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4778 scheme, labels, and so on.
4779 Additionally, you can
4780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4787 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4788 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4789 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4790 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4792 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4794 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4797 \begin_layout Standard
4798 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4799 \begin_inset Graphics
4800 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4806 at the left end of the toolbar.
4808 will change the environment of the
4812 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4813 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4814 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4818 \begin_layout Standard
4827 create a new paragraph using the
4831 paragraph environment.
4833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4840 because if you are in one of these environments:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4849 \begin_layout Itemize
4855 \begin_layout Itemize
4861 \begin_layout Itemize
4867 \begin_layout Itemize
4873 \begin_layout Itemize
4879 \begin_layout Itemize
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4887 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4891 , rather than resetting it to
4896 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4897 \begin_inset space ~
4901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4903 reference "sec:Nesting"
4910 \begin_layout Subsection
4914 \begin_layout Standard
4915 The default paragraph environment is
4920 It creates a plain paragraph.
4922 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4923 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4924 this manual) are in the
4931 \begin_layout Standard
4932 You can nest a paragraph using the
4936 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4944 \begin_layout Subsection
4946 \begin_inset Index idx
4949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4958 \begin_layout Standard
4959 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4960 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4969 for thanks or contact information.
4970 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4971 places all of this on a separate page
4972 along with today's date.
4973 For other types of documents, the title
4974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4981 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4985 \begin_layout Standard
4987 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5001 Here's how you use them:
5004 \begin_layout Itemize
5005 Put the title of your document in the
5012 \begin_layout Itemize
5013 Put the author name in the
5020 \begin_layout Itemize
5021 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5022 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5028 Note that using this environment is optional.
5029 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5030 will automatically insert today's date.
5031 If you don't want a date, use the option
5033 Suppress default date on front page
5037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5040 \begin_inset space ~
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5049 You can use footnotes to insert
5050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5057 or contact information.
5060 \begin_layout Subsection
5062 \begin_inset Index idx
5065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5074 name "subsec:Headings"
5081 \begin_layout Standard
5082 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5084 takes care of the numbering for you.
5087 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5089 \begin_inset Index idx
5092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5093 Section headings ! Numbered
5101 \begin_layout Standard
5102 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5106 \begin_layout Enumerate
5112 \begin_layout Enumerate
5118 \begin_layout Enumerate
5124 \begin_layout Enumerate
5130 \begin_layout Enumerate
5136 \begin_layout Enumerate
5142 \begin_layout Enumerate
5148 \begin_layout Standard
5150 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5151 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5152 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5157 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5158 You group the book into chapters.
5160 does a similar grouping:
5163 \begin_layout Itemize
5168 is divided into either
5179 \begin_layout Itemize
5191 \begin_layout Itemize
5203 \begin_layout Itemize
5215 \begin_layout Itemize
5227 \begin_layout Itemize
5239 \begin_layout Standard
5240 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5248 Not all document types use the
5252 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5257 is the top-level heading.
5265 \begin_layout Standard
5270 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5271 labels it with its number,
5272 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5274 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5286 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5288 \begin_inset Index idx
5291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5292 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5300 \begin_layout Standard
5301 The unnumbered section headings have a
5302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5309 at the end of their name.
5310 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5311 the table of contents, see section
5312 \begin_inset space ~
5316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5326 Changing the Numbering
5327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5329 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5337 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5338 in the Table of Contents.
5339 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5341 Just as certain classes start with
5355 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5365 This is something you can change.
5368 \begin_layout Standard
5371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5375 \begin_inset Index idx
5378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5387 \begin_inset space ~
5391 \begin_inset space ~
5396 you will see two counters.
5401 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5402 numbers a section heading.
5403 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5408 Short Titles of Headings
5409 \begin_inset Index idx
5412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5413 Section headings ! Short titles
5419 \begin_inset Argument 1
5422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5431 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5438 \begin_layout Standard
5439 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5440 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5441 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5442 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5445 \begin_layout Standard
5447 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5448 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5449 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5450 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5453 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5455 \begin_inset space ~
5461 This will insert a box labeled
5462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5466 \begin_inset space ~
5470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5473 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5474 This also works for captions inside floats.
5475 There can only be one short title per title.
5478 \begin_layout Standard
5479 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5486 \begin_layout Standard
5487 The following information applies to all section headings:
5490 \begin_layout Itemize
5491 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5494 \begin_layout Itemize
5495 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5498 \begin_layout Itemize
5499 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5502 \begin_layout Itemize
5503 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5506 \begin_layout Subsection
5510 \begin_layout Standard
5512 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5526 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5527 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5528 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5529 the text they contain.
5530 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5538 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5551 when you start a new paragraph.
5552 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5556 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5557 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5558 have to change back to the
5562 environment yourself.
5565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5574 \begin_inset Index idx
5577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5588 time for the differences.
5597 are identical except for one difference:
5601 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5610 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5613 \begin_layout Standard
5614 Here's an example of the
5627 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5629 See – no indentation!
5633 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5634 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5635 the other paragraph.
5638 \begin_layout Standard
5639 Here's another example, this time in the
5646 \begin_layout Quotation
5652 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5653 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5654 the first line, then
5658 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5662 you were quoting other text.
5665 \begin_layout Quotation
5666 Here's a new paragraph.
5667 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5668 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5671 \begin_layout Standard
5672 As the examples show,
5676 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5677 They should put quotes in the
5682 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5686 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5691 \begin_inset Index idx
5694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5701 \begin_inset Index idx
5704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5720 \begin_layout Standard
5725 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5731 \begin_inset Newline newline
5734 Which I did not rehearse!
5738 It could be much worse.
5739 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5741 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5742 indented a bit more than the first.
5743 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5749 \begin_inset Newline newline
5752 And make things look fine
5753 \begin_inset Newline newline
5759 arg "newline-insert newline"
5765 \begin_layout Standard
5770 does not indent both margins.
5771 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5772 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5775 arg "newline-insert newline"
5781 \begin_layout Subsection
5783 \begin_inset Index idx
5786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5804 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5814 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5815 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5824 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5825 lets you provide your own label.
5826 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5827 describing some general features of all four of them.
5830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5835 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5837 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5838 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5847 reset the environment to
5851 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5852 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5853 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5857 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5861 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5868 \begin_layout Standard
5869 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5870 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5871 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5873 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5874 you read all of section
5875 \begin_inset space ~
5879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5881 reference "sec:Nesting"
5888 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5890 \begin_inset Index idx
5893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5914 paragraph environment.
5915 It has the following properties:
5918 \begin_layout Itemize
5919 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The items can have any length.
5936 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5937 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 environment inside another
5953 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5957 \begin_layout Itemize
5958 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5961 \begin_layout Itemize
5963 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5966 \begin_layout Itemize
5968 \begin_inset space ~
5972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5974 reference "sec:Nesting"
5978 for a full explanation of nesting.
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5992 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5995 \begin_layout Standard
5996 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5997 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6000 \begin_layout Itemize
6001 The label for the first level
6005 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6009 \begin_layout Itemize
6010 The label for the second level is a dash.
6014 \begin_layout Itemize
6015 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6019 \begin_layout Itemize
6020 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6024 \begin_layout Itemize
6025 Back out to the third level.
6029 \begin_layout Itemize
6030 Back to the second level.
6034 \begin_layout Itemize
6035 Back to the outermost level.
6038 \begin_layout Standard
6039 These are the default labels for an
6044 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6046 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6049 dialog in the submenu
6054 \begin_inset Index idx
6057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6063 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6067 \begin_layout Standard
6068 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6069 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6071 \begin_inset space ~
6075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6077 reference "sec:Nesting"
6084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6086 \begin_inset Index idx
6089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6098 name "sec:Enumerate"
6105 \begin_layout Standard
6110 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6111 It has these properties:
6114 \begin_layout Enumerate
6115 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6119 \begin_layout Enumerate
6120 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6129 \begin_layout Enumerate
6134 environment resets the counter to one.
6137 \begin_layout Enumerate
6150 \begin_layout Enumerate
6151 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6152 Items can have any length.
6155 \begin_layout Enumerate
6156 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6159 \begin_layout Enumerate
6160 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6163 \begin_layout Enumerate
6164 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6168 \begin_layout Standard
6177 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6179 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6180 labels the four different levels in an
6187 \begin_layout Enumerate
6188 The first level of an
6192 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6196 \begin_layout Enumerate
6197 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6201 \begin_layout Enumerate
6202 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6206 \begin_layout Enumerate
6207 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6210 \begin_layout Enumerate
6211 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6216 \begin_layout Enumerate
6217 Back to the third level
6221 \begin_layout Enumerate
6222 Back to the second level.
6226 \begin_layout Enumerate
6227 Back to the outermost level.
6230 \begin_layout Standard
6231 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6235 environment, see section
6236 \begin_inset space ~
6240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6242 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6247 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6251 \begin_layout Standard
6252 There is more to nesting
6256 environments than we've stated here.
6257 You should read section
6258 \begin_inset space ~
6262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6264 reference "sec:Nesting"
6268 to learn more about nesting.
6271 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6273 \begin_inset Index idx
6276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6285 \begin_layout Standard
6286 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6290 list has no fixed label.
6291 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6300 of the first line as the label.
6304 \begin_layout Description
6305 Example: This is an example of the
6312 \begin_layout Standard
6314 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6318 \begin_layout Standard
6320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6327 it is meant that the first usage of the
6331 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6333 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6341 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6349 \begin_inset space ~
6355 \begin_inset space ~
6359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6361 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6365 for more information.) Here is an example:
6368 \begin_layout Description
6370 \begin_inset space ~
6373 Example: This one shows how to use a
6376 \begin_inset space ~
6388 \begin_layout Description
6389 Usage: You should use the
6393 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6394 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6396 It's not a good idea to use a
6400 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6401 You're better off using
6413 paragraphs into them.
6416 \begin_layout Description
6417 Nesting: You can nest
6421 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6425 \begin_layout Standard
6426 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6427 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6428 them from the first line.
6431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6433 \begin_inset Index idx
6436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6445 \begin_layout Standard
6450 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6451 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6455 \begin_layout Standard
6464 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6466 Here are its properties:
6469 \begin_layout Labeling
6470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6472 \begin_inset space ~
6475 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6484 of each line as the item label.
6489 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6490 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6491 space as described above.
6494 \begin_layout Labeling
6495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6496 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6497 uses different margins for the item label and the
6498 body of the item text.
6499 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6500 label width plus a little extra space.
6504 \begin_layout Labeling
6505 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6507 \begin_inset space ~
6510 width \SpecialChar LyX
6511 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6512 If the label width is larger, the label
6513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6520 into the first line.
6521 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6522 margin of the rest of the item text.
6525 \begin_layout Labeling
6526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6528 \begin_inset space ~
6531 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6536 environment has the same left margin.
6537 \begin_inset Newline newline
6540 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6545 \begin_inset space ~
6550 dialog (toolbar button
6553 arg "layout-paragraph"
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6565 determines the default label width.
6566 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6575 multiple times instead.
6576 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6586 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6589 \begin_inset space ~
6594 every time you alter a label in a
6599 \begin_inset Newline newline
6602 The predefined default width is the length of
6603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6611 \begin_inset space ~
6617 \begin_layout Standard
6622 list the same way as the
6626 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6632 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6636 \begin_layout Standard
6641 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6642 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6644 \begin_inset space ~
6648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6650 reference "sec:Nesting"
6654 to learn about nesting.
6657 \begin_layout Standard
6658 There is yet another feature of the
6662 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6663 left-justifies the item labels by
6665 You can use additional
6669 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6670 justifies the item label.
6675 are documented in section
6676 \begin_inset space ~
6680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6682 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6687 Here are some examples:
6690 \begin_layout Labeling
6691 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6692 Left The default for
6699 \begin_layout Labeling
6700 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6701 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6708 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6711 \begin_layout Labeling
6712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6713 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6717 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6724 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6727 \begin_layout Subsection
6729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6731 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6736 \begin_inset Index idx
6739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6748 \begin_layout Standard
6749 The features described in this section require that the module
6751 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6753 is loaded in the document settings.
6754 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6760 \begin_inset Index idx
6763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6774 Custom Enumerate Lists
6775 \begin_inset Index idx
6778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6779 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6787 \begin_layout Standard
6789 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6795 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6796 There you add the command
6799 \begin_layout Standard
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6820 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6821 Code, look at section
6822 \begin_inset space ~
6826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6828 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6841 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6848 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6849 For capital Roman numerals replace
6861 in the command above.
6862 For Arabic numerals use
6870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6877 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6892 \begin_layout Standard
6894 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6902 You can only number 26
6903 \begin_inset space ~
6906 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6914 \begin_layout Standard
6915 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6916 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6919 \begin_layout Standard
6920 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6923 \begin_layout Enumerate
6924 \begin_inset Argument 1
6927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6953 \begin_layout Enumerate
6954 \begin_inset Argument 1
6957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_layout Enumerate
6985 \begin_layout Enumerate
6986 \begin_inset Argument 1
6989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7013 \begin_layout Enumerate
7014 \begin_inset Argument 1
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7043 \begin_layout Standard
7044 For this list these commands were used:
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7058 \begin_inset Newline newline
7066 \begin_inset Newline newline
7074 \begin_inset Newline newline
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7091 makes the label emphasized and
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7101 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7109 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7110 lists until you change the definition.
7118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7120 \begin_inset Index idx
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7124 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7132 \begin_layout Standard
7133 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7136 \begin_layout Enumerate
7137 \begin_inset Argument 1
7140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 \begin_inset Note Note
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 goes back to default numbering
7171 \begin_layout Enumerate
7175 \begin_layout Standard
7179 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7183 \begin_layout Standard
7184 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7189 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7190 to indicate that it is a resumed
7191 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7192 , but in the output.
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7204 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7213 \begin_layout Standard
7214 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7216 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7217 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7218 of a normal enumeration.
7219 There, insert the command
7222 \begin_layout Standard
7228 \begin_layout Standard
7233 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7237 \begin_layout Enumerate
7241 \begin_layout Enumerate
7245 \begin_layout Standard
7246 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7249 \begin_layout Enumerate
7250 \begin_inset Argument 1
7253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7269 This enumeration starts at 4
7272 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7274 \begin_inset Index idx
7277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7289 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7292 \begin_layout Itemize
7296 \begin_layout Itemize
7297 with standard spacing
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7301 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7303 Add there the command
7307 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7310 \begin_layout Itemize
7311 \begin_inset Argument 1
7314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7333 \begin_layout Itemize
7337 \begin_layout Itemize
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7342 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7349 \begin_inset Index idx
7352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7360 For more information see its documentation,
7361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7371 \begin_layout Standard
7372 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7374 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7375 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7379 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7382 \begin_layout Enumerate
7383 \begin_inset Argument 1
7386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7407 \begin_layout Enumerate
7408 with negative indentation
7411 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7412 Further Customization
7413 \begin_inset Index idx
7416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7417 Lists ! Customization
7425 \begin_layout Standard
7426 You can also change the style of description lists.
7430 \begin_layout Standard
7436 \begin_layout Standard
7437 changes the description label font, the command
7440 \begin_layout Standard
7446 \begin_layout Standard
7447 sets the list style.
7450 \begin_layout Standard
7451 An example where the command
7454 \begin_layout Standard
7459 itshape, style=nextline
7462 \begin_layout Standard
7466 \begin_layout Description
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7472 \begin_inset Argument 1
7475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7481 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7483 itshape, style=nextline
7493 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7494 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7498 \begin_layout Description
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7503 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7504 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7505 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7509 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7515 \begin_inset Index idx
7518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 For more information see its documentation
7527 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7537 \begin_layout Subsection
7539 \begin_inset Index idx
7542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7553 \begin_inset space ~
7556 Address: An Overview
7559 \begin_layout Standard
7560 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7561 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7569 \begin_inset space ~
7575 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7576 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7577 gags on the document.
7578 In contrast, you can use the
7585 \begin_inset space ~
7590 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7591 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7595 \begin_layout Standard
7596 Of course, you're not limited to using
7603 \begin_inset space ~
7612 \begin_inset space ~
7617 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7618 some European academic papers.
7621 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7625 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7632 \begin_layout Standard
7637 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7638 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7642 \begin_inset space ~
7647 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7648 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7649 Here's an example of each:
7652 \begin_layout Right Address
7654 \begin_inset Newline newline
7658 \begin_inset Newline newline
7662 \begin_inset Newline newline
7665 When is it? What is today?
7668 \begin_layout Standard
7672 \begin_inset space ~
7678 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7680 the largest block of text on a single line.
7681 Here's an example of the
7688 \begin_layout Address
7690 \begin_inset Newline newline
7693 Where do I send this
7694 \begin_inset Newline newline
7697 Your post office and country
7700 \begin_layout Standard
7701 As you can see, both
7708 \begin_inset space ~
7713 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7718 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7719 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7725 This makes sense, since
7733 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7734 Thus, you have to use
7741 arg "newline-insert newline"
7746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7747 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7749 \begin_inset space ~
7753 \begin_inset space ~
7758 ) to start a new line in an
7765 \begin_inset space ~
7773 \begin_layout Subsection
7777 \begin_layout Standard
7778 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7779 or list of references.
7781 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7786 \begin_inset Index idx
7789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_layout Standard
7803 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7804 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7805 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7806 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7820 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7821 The book document classes ignores the
7825 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7829 in a letter document class.
7832 \begin_layout Standard
7837 environment does several things for you.
7838 First, it puts the centered label
7839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7847 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7849 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7850 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7851 the subsequent text.
7852 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7854 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7858 \begin_layout Standard
7859 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7863 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7864 The new paragraph will still be in the
7869 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7870 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7873 \begin_layout Standard
7874 \begin_inset Float figure
7881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7883 \begin_inset Graphics
7884 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7892 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7897 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 We would love to demonstrate the
7923 environment, but since this document is in the
7924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7931 class, we can't do this.
7932 We inserted it therefore as figure
7933 \begin_inset space ~
7937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7939 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7944 If you have never heard of an
7945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7952 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7957 \begin_inset Index idx
7960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7969 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7976 \begin_layout Standard
7981 environment is used to list references.
7982 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7983 only use it at the end of the document.
7995 \begin_layout Standard
7996 When you first open a
8000 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8001 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8017 depending on the document class.
8018 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8019 Each paragraph of the
8023 environment is a bibliography entry.
8028 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8029 Each new paragraph is still in the
8036 \begin_layout Standard
8037 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8038 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8040 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8042 handling, have a look at section
8043 \begin_inset space ~
8047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8049 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8056 \begin_layout Subsection
8057 Special Environments
8060 \begin_layout Standard
8062 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8063 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8071 \begin_inset Index idx
8074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8084 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8091 \begin_layout Standard
8097 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8099 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8104 key as a fixed whitespace.
8108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8121 \begin_inset space ~
8126 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8144 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8147 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8150 arg "newline-insert newline"
8167 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8168 So, when you finish using the
8173 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8174 Also, you can nest the
8179 environment inside of others.
8182 \begin_layout Standard
8183 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8186 \begin_layout Itemize
8190 arg "newline-insert newline"
8193 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8198 \begin_inset space \space{}
8208 arg "newline-insert newline"
8214 \begin_layout Itemize
8218 arg "newline-insert newline"
8228 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8234 \begin_layout Itemize
8235 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8236 You must put at least one
8240 in any line you want blank.
8241 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8245 \begin_layout Itemize
8246 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8250 since that will insert
8255 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8258 arg "self-insert \""
8264 \begin_layout Standard
8268 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8272 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8276 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8280 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8284 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8285 printf("Hello World!
8290 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8294 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8298 \begin_layout Standard
8299 This is just the standard
8300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8311 \begin_layout Standard
8317 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8319 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8320 as if you used a typewriter.
8321 \begin_inset Index idx
8324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8325 Paragraph environments|)
8330 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8333 Program Code Listings
8338 \begin_inset space ~
8346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8350 \begin_inset Index idx
8353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment is similar to the
8372 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8373 computer console text.
8378 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8392 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8393 you can have empty lines.
8406 \begin_layout Itemize
8407 have a certain language and a text style
8410 \begin_layout Itemize
8411 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8412 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8413 and \SpecialChar TeX
8417 \begin_layout Standard
8418 Because of these properties
8422 works like a typewriter.
8426 \begin_layout Verbatim
8431 \begin_layout Verbatim
8435 The following 2 lines are empty:
8438 \begin_layout Verbatim
8442 \begin_layout Verbatim
8446 \begin_layout Verbatim
8448 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8453 \begin_layout Standard
8458 environment is identical to
8462 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8463 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8470 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8475 \begin_layout Section
8476 Nesting Environments
8477 \begin_inset Index idx
8480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8481 Nesting ! Environments
8487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8496 \begin_layout Subsection
8500 \begin_layout Standard
8502 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8504 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8506 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8508 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8520 \begin_layout Enumerate
8524 \begin_layout Enumerate
8529 \begin_layout Enumerate
8533 \begin_layout Enumerate
8538 \begin_layout Enumerate
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8544 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8546 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8548 \begin_inset space ~
8552 \begin_inset space ~
8560 \begin_inset space ~
8564 \begin_inset space ~
8569 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8571 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8574 arg "depth-increment"
8580 arg "depth-decrement"
8594 arg "depth-increment"
8600 arg "depth-decrement"
8604 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8605 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8609 \begin_layout Standard
8610 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8611 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8612 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8613 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8614 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8617 \begin_layout Standard
8618 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8620 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8622 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8625 \begin_layout Subsection
8626 What You Can and Can't Nest
8629 \begin_layout Standard
8630 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8631 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8634 \begin_layout Standard
8635 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8636 than a simple yes or no.
8637 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 Completely unnestable
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8654 \begin_layout Standard
8655 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8656 environments have them:
8659 \begin_layout Description
8660 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8661 Can't nest into them.
8665 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Description
8698 \begin_inset space ~
8701 Nestable You can nest them.
8702 You can nest other things into them.
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_layout Description
8769 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8770 You can't nest anything into them.
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8780 \begin_layout Itemize
8786 \begin_layout Itemize
8792 \begin_layout Itemize
8798 \begin_layout Itemize
8804 \begin_layout Itemize
8810 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Itemize
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8828 \begin_layout Itemize
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Itemize
8852 \begin_layout Itemize
8856 \begin_inset space ~
8862 \begin_layout Itemize
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8870 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8878 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8888 \begin_inset space ~
8891 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8892 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8893 nested section headings violate this.
8901 \begin_layout Subsection
8902 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8903 \begin_inset Index idx
8906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8907 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8915 \begin_layout Standard
8916 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8917 affected by nesting anyhow.
8921 \begin_layout Itemize
8925 \begin_layout Itemize
8929 \begin_layout Itemize
8933 \begin_layout Standard
8935 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8943 Figures and tables in
8947 are not affected by this.
8952 Have a look at section
8953 \begin_inset space ~
8957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8959 reference "sec:Floats"
8963 for more information about
8970 \begin_layout Standard
8972 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8973 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8977 \begin_layout Standard
8978 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8986 of its own, it behaves just like a
8987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8994 paragraph environment.
8995 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8999 \begin_layout Standard
9000 Here's an example with a table:
9003 \begin_layout Enumerate
9008 \begin_layout Enumerate
9009 This is (a) and it's nested.
9013 \begin_layout Standard
9014 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9020 \begin_layout Standard
9022 \begin_inset Tabular
9023 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9024 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9025 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9026 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9110 \begin_layout Standard
9111 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9118 \begin_layout Enumerate
9120 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9124 \begin_layout Enumerate
9128 \begin_layout Standard
9129 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9137 \begin_layout Enumerate
9138 This is (a) and it's nested.
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9143 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9151 \begin_inset Tabular
9152 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9153 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9155 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9239 \begin_layout Standard
9240 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9246 \begin_layout Enumerate
9253 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9256 \begin_layout Enumerate
9260 \begin_layout Standard
9261 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9269 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9272 \begin_layout Enumerate
9277 \begin_layout Enumerate
9278 This is (a) and it's nested.
9281 \begin_layout Standard
9282 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9288 \begin_layout Standard
9290 \begin_inset Tabular
9291 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9292 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9293 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9294 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9379 \begin_layout Standard
9380 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9386 \begin_layout Enumerate
9388 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9395 \begin_layout Enumerate
9399 \begin_layout Standard
9400 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9406 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9407 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9411 \begin_layout Subsection
9412 Usage and General Features
9415 \begin_layout Standard
9416 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9417 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9426 is the innermost possible depth.
9427 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9430 \begin_layout Enumerate
9431 level #1 – outermost
9435 \begin_layout Enumerate
9440 \begin_layout Enumerate
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9450 \begin_layout Itemize
9455 \begin_layout Itemize
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9465 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9466 both of them in the example.
9467 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9477 For example, if we tried to nest another
9482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9489 , we would get errors.
9492 \begin_layout Subsection
9494 \begin_inset Index idx
9497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9506 \begin_layout Standard
9507 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9508 We have several examples of nested environments.
9509 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9513 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9514 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9517 \begin_layout Labeling
9518 \labelwidthstring MMM
9519 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9528 \begin_layout Labeling
9529 \labelwidthstring MMM
9530 #2-a This is level #2.
9531 We created it by using
9534 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9540 arg "depth-increment"
9547 \begin_layout Labeling
9548 \labelwidthstring MMM
9549 #3-a This is level #3.
9550 This time, we just enter
9557 arg "depth-increment"
9561 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9565 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9571 arg "depth-increment"
9578 \begin_layout Standard
9583 environment, nested inside of
9584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9592 So, it's at level #4.
9593 We did this by entering
9596 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9602 arg "depth-increment"
9605 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9610 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9626 \begin_layout Standard
9631 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9634 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9640 \begin_layout Labeling
9641 \labelwidthstring MMM
9642 #4-a This is level #4.
9646 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9649 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9654 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9658 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9663 keep nesting things inside
9664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9675 \begin_layout Labeling
9676 \labelwidthstring MMM
9677 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9682 \begin_layout Labeling
9683 \labelwidthstring MMM
9684 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9685 and this is level #6.
9686 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9690 \begin_layout Labeling
9691 \labelwidthstring MMM
9692 #5-b Back to level #5.
9696 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9702 arg "depth-decrement"
9709 \begin_layout Labeling
9710 \labelwidthstring MMM
9714 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9720 arg "depth-decrement"
9723 , we're back at level #4.
9727 \begin_layout Labeling
9728 \labelwidthstring MMM
9729 #3-b Back to level #3.
9730 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9734 \begin_layout Labeling
9735 \labelwidthstring MMM
9736 #2-b Back to level #2.
9741 \begin_layout Labeling
9742 \labelwidthstring MMM
9743 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9744 After this sentence, we will enter
9748 and change the paragraph environment back to
9755 \begin_layout Standard
9756 We could have also used the
9772 environment in place of the
9777 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9781 Example 2: Inheritance
9784 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9785 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9788 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9797 arg "depth-increment"
9801 \begin_inset Newline newline
9804 which, we will change to the
9812 \begin_layout Enumerate
9817 environment, at level #2.
9820 \begin_layout Enumerate
9821 Notice how the nested
9825 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9829 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9833 \begin_layout Standard
9834 We ended this example by entering
9839 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9843 and reset the nesting depth by using
9846 arg "depth-decrement"
9852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9853 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9862 \begin_inset Argument 1
9865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9866 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9874 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 This is level #1, in an
9879 paragraph environment.
9880 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9884 \begin_layout Enumerate
9889 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9895 arg "depth-increment"
9899 Now, what happens if we nest an
9903 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9904 label be? An asterisk?
9908 \begin_layout Itemize
9918 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9919 So, its label is a bullet.
9920 (We got here by using
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9929 arg "depth-increment"
9932 , then changing the environment to
9940 \begin_layout Itemize
9941 Here's level #4, produced using
9944 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9950 arg "depth-increment"
9954 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9959 \begin_layout Enumerate
9962 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9967 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9971 , because we are in the
9979 environment (that is, it is an
9994 \begin_layout Enumerate
9999 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10000 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10004 \begin_layout Enumerate
10005 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10008 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10011 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10014 \begin_layout Enumerate
10018 arg "depth-decrement"
10021 to decrease the depth after the next
10024 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10031 \begin_layout Enumerate
10033 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10038 \begin_layout Enumerate
10040 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10041 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10045 \begin_layout Enumerate
10046 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10055 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10060 reset the counter for the label.
10064 \begin_layout Enumerate
10068 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10074 arg "depth-decrement"
10077 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10078 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10079 into the twofold-nested
10087 \begin_layout Enumerate
10088 The same thing happens if we do another
10091 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10097 arg "depth-decrement"
10100 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10103 \begin_layout Standard
10104 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10109 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10120 The number of other
10124 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10131 The same rule applies for the
10135 environment, as well.
10138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10139 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10142 \begin_layout Enumerate
10143 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10144 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10145 the same detail with how we did it.
10154 \begin_layout Standard
10162 arg "depth-increment"
10169 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10170 the example in parentheses someplace.
10171 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10172 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10173 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10177 \begin_layout Enumerate
10182 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10186 \begin_layout Verse
10187 Now we will add verse.
10188 \begin_inset Newline newline
10191 It will get much worse.
10192 \begin_inset Newline newline
10202 arg "depth-increment"
10212 \begin_layout Verse
10213 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10214 \begin_inset Newline newline
10217 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10218 \begin_inset Newline newline
10224 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10232 \begin_layout Verse
10233 Here comes a table:
10237 \begin_layout Standard
10238 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10244 \begin_layout Standard
10246 \begin_inset Tabular
10247 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10248 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10335 \begin_layout Verse
10339 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10349 arg "depth-increment"
10355 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10361 \begin_inset Newline newline
10369 arg "depth-decrement"
10376 \begin_layout Enumerate
10381 : level #1) This is another item.
10382 Note that selecting a
10386 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10387 3 times to put the table inside the
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We're now ending the
10400 list and changing to
10405 We're still at level #1.
10406 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10407 The next set of paragraphs is a
10408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10415 We will nest both the
10422 \begin_inset space ~
10427 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10431 for the letter body.
10435 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10438 to preserve the depth.
10439 Remember that you need to use
10442 arg "newline-insert newline"
10445 to create multiple lines inside the
10452 \begin_inset space ~
10462 \begin_layout Right Address
10464 \begin_inset Newline newline
10467 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10468 \begin_inset Newline newline
10474 \begin_layout Address
10476 \begin_inset space ~
10482 \begin_layout Quotation
10483 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10487 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10488 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10489 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10490 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10491 as soon as possible.
10492 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10495 \begin_layout Quotation
10496 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10497 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10498 with your order, along with payment.
10501 \begin_layout Quotation
10502 We thank you again for your patience.
10505 \begin_layout Address
10507 \begin_inset Newline newline
10514 \begin_layout Quotation
10515 That ends that example!
10518 \begin_layout Standard
10519 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10520 gives you a lot of power with just
10522 We could have easily nested an
10543 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10546 \begin_layout Subsection
10548 \begin_inset Index idx
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10552 Nesting ! Separation
10558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10560 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10567 \begin_layout Standard
10568 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10570 For example you need two different enumerations:
10573 \begin_layout Enumerate
10578 \begin_layout Enumerate
10583 \begin_layout Enumerate
10587 \begin_layout Standard
10588 \begin_inset Separator plain
10594 \begin_layout Itemize
10600 \begin_layout Standard
10601 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10607 \begin_layout Enumerate
10611 \begin_layout Enumerate
10615 \begin_layout Enumerate
10619 \begin_layout Standard
10620 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10621 list item and use the menu
10623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10624 Separated <Name> Above
10628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10629 Separated <Name> Below
10632 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10633 ) and before or behind it the
10635 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10639 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10640 (red arrow in LyX).
10641 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10642 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10645 \begin_layout Standard
10646 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10649 arg "paragraph-break"
10656 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10659 \begin_layout Section
10660 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10661 \begin_inset Index idx
10664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10673 \begin_layout Standard
10674 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10675 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10677 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10678 be broken at the end of a line.
10679 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10683 \begin_layout Subsection
10685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10687 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10692 \begin_inset Index idx
10695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10706 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10707 ) not to break the line at
10709 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10712 \begin_layout Quote
10713 Further documentation is given in section
10714 \begin_inset Newline newline
10718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10720 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10728 \begin_layout Standard
10729 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10744 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10753 A protected space is set with
10755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10756 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10766 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10772 \begin_layout Subsection
10774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10776 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10781 \begin_inset Index idx
10784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10785 Spacing ! Horizontal
10793 \begin_layout Standard
10794 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10797 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10801 The length units are listed in Appendix
10802 \begin_inset space ~
10806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10808 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10819 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10824 \begin_inset Index idx
10827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10828 Spaces ! Inter-word
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10838 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10839 at the ends of sentences.
10840 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10841 automatically takes care about this.
10842 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10843 followed by a period; see section
10844 \begin_inset space ~
10848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10850 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10855 To insert a normal space, select
10857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 \begin_inset space ~
10868 arg "space-insert normal"
10874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10878 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10883 \begin_inset Index idx
10886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10895 \begin_layout Standard
10897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10904 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10913 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10914 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10915 inside abbreviations:
10918 \begin_layout Quote
10920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10924 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10927 \begin_layout Standard
10928 or between values and units.
10929 Compare for example this:
10930 \begin_inset Newline newline
10934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10938 \begin_inset Newline newline
10941 10 kg (normal space
10944 \begin_layout Standard
10945 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10948 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10950 \begin_inset space ~
10958 arg "space-insert thin"
10964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10968 \begin_layout Standard
10969 You can also insert the following space types:
10972 \begin_layout Description
10974 \begin_inset space ~
10978 \begin_inset space ~
10981 space A line with a
10982 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10986 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10990 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10993 negative thin space between the arrows.
10996 \begin_layout Description
10998 \begin_inset space ~
11002 \begin_inset space ~
11005 space A line with a
11006 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11010 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11014 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11017 negative medium space between the arrows.
11020 \begin_layout Description
11022 \begin_inset space ~
11026 \begin_inset space ~
11029 space A line with a
11030 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11034 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11038 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11041 negative thick space between the arrows.
11044 \begin_layout Description
11046 \begin_inset space ~
11050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11054 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11058 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11062 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11066 \begin_inset space ~
11070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11073 em) space between the arrows.
11076 \begin_layout Description
11078 \begin_inset space ~
11082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11086 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11090 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11094 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11098 \begin_inset space ~
11102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11105 em) space between the arrows.
11108 \begin_layout Description
11110 \begin_inset space ~
11114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11118 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11122 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11126 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11130 \begin_inset space ~
11134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11137 em) space between the arrows.
11140 \begin_layout Description
11142 \begin_inset space ~
11146 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11150 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11155 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11162 cm space between the arrows.
11165 \begin_layout Standard
11167 \begin_inset space ~
11171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11173 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11177 lists the different space sizes.
11180 \begin_layout Standard
11181 \begin_inset Float table
11188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11189 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11194 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11198 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 \begin_inset Tabular
11209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11210 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11328 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11487 \begin_inset Index idx
11490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11500 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11501 feature for adding extra space
11502 in a uniform fashion.
11503 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11504 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11505 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11506 equally between themselves.
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11510 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11513 \begin_layout Quote
11515 This is on the left side
11516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11519 This is on the right
11522 \begin_layout Quote
11525 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11529 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11535 \begin_layout Quote
11538 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11546 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11552 \begin_layout Standard
11553 That was an example in the
11559 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11563 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11567 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11570 is one in a standard paragraph.
11571 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11575 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11578 \begin_layout Standard
11579 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11582 \begin_inset space ~
11587 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11590 \begin_layout Standard
11592 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11596 \begin_inset space ~
11602 \begin_layout Standard
11604 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11608 \begin_inset space ~
11614 \begin_layout Standard
11616 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11620 \begin_inset space ~
11626 \begin_layout Standard
11628 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11632 \begin_inset space ~
11638 \begin_layout Standard
11640 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11644 \begin_inset space ~
11650 \begin_layout Standard
11652 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11656 \begin_inset space ~
11662 \begin_layout Standard
11663 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11671 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11675 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11677 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11678 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11682 option in the space dialog.
11690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11694 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11699 \begin_inset Index idx
11702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11711 \begin_layout Standard
11712 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11713 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11717 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11720 What is correct English?:
11721 \begin_inset Newline newline
11725 \begin_inset Newline newline
11729 \begin_inset space ~
11732 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11733 \begin_inset Newline newline
11737 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11748 \begin_inset Newline newline
11752 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11769 \begin_layout Standard
11771 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11776 \begin_inset space ~
11780 \begin_inset space ~
11784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11788 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11791 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11795 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11801 \begin_inset space ~
11805 \begin_inset space ~
11809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11812 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11821 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11822 That is why it is named
11823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11831 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11832 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11836 \begin_layout Subsection
11838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11840 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11845 \begin_inset Index idx
11848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11857 \begin_layout Standard
11858 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11863 \begin_inset space ~
11869 There you find the following sizes:
11872 \begin_layout Standard
11885 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11886 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11891 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11894 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11896 \begin_inset space ~
11902 \begin_inset Index idx
11905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 Document ! Settings
11911 for the paragraph separation.
11912 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11923 \begin_layout Standard
11929 \begin_inset Index idx
11932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11938 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11939 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11944 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11945 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11954 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11963 s are described in section
11964 \begin_inset space ~
11968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11970 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11979 If there are several
11983 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11984 You can therefore use
11988 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11991 \begin_layout Standard
11996 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11997 \begin_inset space ~
12001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12003 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12010 \begin_layout Standard
12011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12021 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12022 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12034 \begin_layout Subsection
12035 Paragraph Alignment
12036 \begin_inset Index idx
12039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12040 Paragraph ! Alignment
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12049 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12051 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12054 dialog (toolbar button
12057 arg "layout-paragraph"
12061 There are five possibilities:
12064 \begin_layout Itemize
12072 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12078 \begin_layout Itemize
12086 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12092 \begin_layout Itemize
12100 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12106 \begin_layout Itemize
12114 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12120 \begin_layout Itemize
12128 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12134 \begin_layout Standard
12135 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12136 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12137 the left and right margins.
12138 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12143 This paragraph is right aligned,
12146 \begin_layout Standard
12148 this one is centered,
12151 \begin_layout Standard
12153 this one is left aligned.
12156 \begin_layout Subsection
12158 \begin_inset Index idx
12161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12162 Page breaks ! Forced
12168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12170 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12177 \begin_layout Standard
12178 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12179 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12180 force a page break where you want one.
12181 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12182 is good at page breaking.
12183 Only if you use a lot of
12187 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12188 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12192 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12193 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12197 have to change the page breaking.
12200 \begin_layout Standard
12201 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12203 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12206 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12208 \begin_inset space ~
12214 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12217 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12219 \begin_inset space ~
12224 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12226 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12227 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12230 \begin_layout Standard
12231 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12232 at the top of a page.
12233 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12235 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12236 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12237 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12241 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12245 to learn more about
12252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12256 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12261 \begin_inset Index idx
12264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12265 Page breaks ! Clear
12273 \begin_layout Standard
12274 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12275 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12276 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12277 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12278 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12281 \begin_layout Standard
12282 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12285 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12287 \begin_inset space ~
12293 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12296 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12298 \begin_inset space ~
12302 \begin_inset space ~
12307 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12308 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12311 \begin_layout Subsection
12313 \begin_inset Index idx
12316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12325 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12332 \begin_layout Standard
12333 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12335 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12338 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12340 \begin_inset space ~
12344 \begin_inset space ~
12352 arg "newline-insert newline"
12356 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12361 \begin_inset space ~
12365 \begin_inset space ~
12373 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12376 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12378 This is useful to avoid
12379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12386 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12390 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12391 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12393 very good at line breaking.
12394 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12395 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12396 \begin_inset space ~
12400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12402 reference "sec:Quote"
12407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12409 reference "sec:Verse"
12414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12416 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12423 \begin_layout Subsection
12425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12427 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12432 \begin_inset Index idx
12435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12444 \begin_layout Standard
12446 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12457 \begin_layout Standard
12461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12462 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12464 \begin_inset space ~
12469 you can insert horizontal lines.
12470 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12471 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12472 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12475 \begin_layout Standard
12477 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12488 \begin_layout Section
12489 Characters and Symbols
12492 \begin_layout Standard
12493 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12494 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12495 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12503 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12507 for information on how this is done.
12510 \begin_layout Standard
12511 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12516 dialog via the menu
12518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12519 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12525 \begin_layout Standard
12526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12534 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12535 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12537 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12545 \begin_layout Section
12546 Fonts and Text Styles
12547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12549 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12556 \begin_layout Subsection
12558 \begin_inset Index idx
12561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12570 \begin_layout Standard
12571 There are two types of fonts:
12574 \begin_layout Description
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12580 \begin_inset Index idx
12583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12589 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12594 characters) in the font.
12595 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12596 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12597 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12598 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12599 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12600 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12601 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12602 \begin_inset Newline newline
12605 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12606 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12607 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12608 sizes than at small ones.
12609 \begin_inset Newline newline
12623 \begin_inset space ~
12631 \begin_layout Description
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset Index idx
12640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12646 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12647 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12648 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12649 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12650 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12651 image manipulation program.
12652 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12653 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12654 \begin_inset space ~
12657 pixels high up to 34
12658 \begin_inset space ~
12661 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12662 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12663 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12665 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12666 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12667 \begin_inset Newline newline
12670 Bitmap fonts are named
12673 \begin_inset space ~
12678 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12681 \begin_layout Standard
12682 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12683 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12684 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12685 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12686 use scalable fonts.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12693 \begin_layout Standard
12694 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12696 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12698 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12701 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12702 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12703 font to emphasize text, you use an
12704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12712 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12714 In \SpecialChar LyX
12715 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12719 \begin_layout Subsection
12722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12724 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12731 \begin_layout Standard
12732 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12733 used its own fonts.
12734 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12735 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12738 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12739 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12740 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12741 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12742 to a word processor.
12743 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12744 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12745 files are very portable across
12746 different machines.
12747 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12748 has increased a lot
12749 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12752 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12754 \begin_inset space ~
12758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12760 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12765 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12766 code in the document
12767 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12770 \begin_layout Standard
12771 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12772 engines that are also able directly
12773 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12775 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12777 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12779 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12780 that is installed on your system.
12781 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12784 \begin_layout Standard
12785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12793 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12794 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12802 \begin_layout Subsection
12803 Document Font and Font size
12804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12806 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12811 \begin_inset Index idx
12814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12821 \begin_inset Index idx
12824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 You can set the document fonts in the
12836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12840 \begin_inset Index idx
12843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12844 Document ! Settings
12854 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12855 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12858 \begin_inset space ~
12867 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12869 \begin_inset space ~
12872 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12875 \begin_layout Standard
12880 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12881 This requires that you use
12893 as the output format, i.
12894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12898 \begin_inset space \space{}
12901 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12902 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12903 installed (see section
12904 \begin_inset space ~
12908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12910 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12915 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12917 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12918 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12923 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12924 cannot determine the family.
12925 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12926 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12929 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12933 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12934 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12939 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12945 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12947 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12949 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12952 font encoding, this is
12953 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12954 , depending on the document language,
12957 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12958 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12982 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12983 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12991 \begin_inset space ~
12997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13005 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13026 European Computer Modern
13029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13037 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13040 \begin_layout Standard
13045 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13046 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13051 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13054 \begin_inset space ~
13059 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13065 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13066 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13069 \begin_layout Itemize
13073 \begin_inset space ~
13078 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13091 \begin_inset space ~
13096 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13097 community in order to replace
13101 as the default font.
13102 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13103 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13120 One difference is improved kerning.
13128 \begin_layout Itemize
13129 If you do not like the look of
13137 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13142 \begin_inset space ~
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13158 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13159 \begin_inset space ~
13162 serif and typewriter fonts,
13166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13167 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13183 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13188 \begin_inset space \space{}
13196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13200 \begin_inset space \space{}
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13214 \begin_inset space ~
13224 but you can also select your own.
13225 \begin_inset Newline newline
13228 The differences between roman,
13231 \begin_inset space ~
13240 fonts are explained in section
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13247 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13252 \begin_inset Newline newline
13258 \begin_inset space ~
13263 was originally designed for newspapers.
13264 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13265 into the small newspaper columns.
13269 \begin_inset space ~
13274 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13277 \begin_layout Standard
13278 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13291 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13296 depends on the class you are using.
13297 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13300 \begin_layout Standard
13301 Note that the font size is the
13306 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13307 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13308 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13309 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13312 \begin_inset space ~
13318 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13325 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13332 \begin_layout Standard
13336 \begin_inset space ~
13341 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13343 \begin_inset space ~
13346 serif or typewriter.
13351 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13361 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13364 \begin_layout Standard
13369 LaTeX font encoding
13371 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13372 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13378 \begin_inset Index idx
13381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13389 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13391 \begin_inset space ~
13395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13397 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13404 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13405 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13406 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13410 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13418 \begin_layout Standard
13419 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13421 Use Old Style Figures
13425 Use True Small Caps
13428 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13431 Use Old Style Figures
13433 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13435 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13443 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13447 Use True Small Caps
13449 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13450 of scaled capitals.
13451 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13452 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13455 \begin_layout Standard
13460 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13461 a font to display the script characters.
13465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13466 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13472 \begin_inset Index idx
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13482 So this has no effect for the document language
13498 \begin_layout Standard
13501 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13503 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13504 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13510 \begin_inset Index idx
13513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13515 packages ! microtype
13524 \begin_layout Standard
13527 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13529 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13534 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13535 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13542 \begin_inset space ~
13546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13548 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13558 \begin_layout Standard
13559 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13563 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13571 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13576 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13577 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13579 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13581 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13584 dialog, see section
13585 \begin_inset space ~
13589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13591 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13603 \begin_layout Subsection
13607 \begin_layout Standard
13608 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13609 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13611 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13612 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13613 choose a math font in the dialog
13615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13619 \begin_inset Index idx
13622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13623 Document ! Settings
13629 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13630 automatically selects a math font.
13631 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13632 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13641 \begin_inset space ~
13647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13652 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13653 document font is available.
13656 \begin_layout Standard
13657 Note that the math font will not be used for
13661 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13667 or by the insertion of the command
13674 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13675 \begin_inset space ~
13679 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13680 while the math characters do not.
13682 \begin_inset space ~
13685 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13688 \begin_inset space ~
13696 \begin_inset space ~
13701 in the document font settings.
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13705 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13706 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13707 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13708 font (in most cases
13709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13715 \begin_inset space ~
13721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13724 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13725 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13733 \begin_inset space ~
13739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13745 \begin_layout Subsection
13747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13749 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13753 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13757 name "subsec:charstyles"
13764 \begin_inset Index idx
13767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13774 \begin_inset Index idx
13777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13786 \begin_layout Standard
13787 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13788 automatically changes the
13789 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13792 style for certain paragraph environments.
13794 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13795 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13797 This is where we meet the concept of
13803 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13805 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13809 \begin_layout Standard
13811 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13816 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13818 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13840 e., available with all document classes.
13841 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13845 for specific purposes.
13846 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13849 \begin_layout Standard
13851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13852 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13862 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13866 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13879 — you customized the
13884 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13885 among them, encourage the use of
13897 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13898 \begin_inset space ~
13902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13904 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13909 Rather than fiddling with
13913 , they encourage the use of
13917 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13922 \begin_inset Quotes els
13926 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13929 ), not their form (
13930 \begin_inset Quotes els
13934 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13938 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13939 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13940 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13941 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13942 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13943 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13949 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13953 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13954 With a semantic markup (such as
13958 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13963 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13965 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13966 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13969 \begin_layout Standard
13971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13972 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13973 by \SpecialChar LyX
13979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13981 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13982 Builtin Text Styles
13983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13985 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13992 \begin_layout Standard
13994 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
13995 The two builtin text styles can be
13996 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14004 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14005 both of these styles
14008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14016 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14022 \begin_layout Standard
14027 style, do one of the following:
14030 \begin_layout Itemize
14031 click on the toolbar button
14040 \begin_layout Itemize
14041 use the key binding
14048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14052 \begin_layout Itemize
14054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14062 arg "dialog-show character"
14068 arg "dialog-show character"
14071 ) as described in section
14072 \begin_inset space ~
14076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14078 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14087 \begin_layout Standard
14088 These commands are all toggles.
14093 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14096 \begin_layout Standard
14097 One typically uses the
14101 style for proper names.
14103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14110 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14116 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14120 \begin_layout Standard
14122 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14127 is producing text in
14131 , but the definition can be changed.
14136 \begin_layout Standard
14138 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14140 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14148 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14155 \begin_layout Itemize
14156 clicking on the toolbar button
14165 \begin_layout Itemize
14166 using the keybindings
14173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14177 \begin_layout Itemize
14179 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14187 arg "dialog-show character"
14193 arg "dialog-show character"
14196 ) as described in section
14197 \begin_inset space ~
14201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14203 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14212 \begin_layout Standard
14217 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14219 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14221 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14224 packages use a different font
14225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14226 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14232 \begin_layout Standard
14233 We've been using the
14237 style all over the place in this document.
14238 Here's one more example:
14241 \begin_layout Quotation
14245 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14247 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14253 \begin_layout Standard
14254 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14255 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14256 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14257 the common tendency to overuse
14258 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14265 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14269 \begin_layout Standard
14271 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14272 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14273 only as font changes and integrated in the
14281 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14284 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14291 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14297 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14300 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14302 \begin_inset space ~
14305 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14307 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14313 arg "dialog-show character"
14319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14321 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14327 arg "dialog-show character"
14331 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14337 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14341 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14348 \begin_layout Standard
14350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14351 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14353 \begin_inset space ~
14357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14359 reference "subsec:Modules"
14366 ), or local layout settings (see section
14367 \begin_inset space ~
14371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14373 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14378 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14382 markup for specific functions.
14383 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14388 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14398 \begin_inset Quotes els
14402 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14408 \begin_layout Standard
14410 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14411 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14413 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14419 \begin_layout Standard
14421 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14422 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14427 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14428 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14429 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14434 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14435 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14440 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14448 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14449 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14450 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14451 \begin_inset Flex Code
14454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14456 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14465 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14470 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14479 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14484 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14493 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14494 on screen their formal appearance.
14499 \begin_layout Subsection
14501 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14507 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14521 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14523 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14529 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14534 \begin_inset Index idx
14537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14546 \begin_layout Standard
14547 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14548 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14551 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14553 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14555 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14559 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14560 the properties of text passages
14561 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14565 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14566 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14567 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14568 from ordinary dialog.
14569 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14573 \begin_layout Standard
14575 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14576 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14577 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14578 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14579 the properties of the respective text passages.
14584 comes in as a last resort.
14589 \begin_layout Standard
14590 Before we document how to
14591 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14592 use custom character style
14593 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14594 tweak the text properties
14596 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14597 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14599 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14603 \begin_inset Newline newline
14606 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14607 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14610 \begin_layout Standard
14612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14613 use custom character styles
14614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14615 tweak text properties
14618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14623 \begin_inset space ~
14626 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14628 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14634 arg "dialog-show character"
14639 dialog or press the toolbar button
14642 arg "dialog-show character"
14647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14650 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14651 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14653 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14656 property that you can choose.
14657 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14660 \begin_inset space ~
14665 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14667 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14673 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14678 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14679 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14680 environments all at once.
14683 \begin_layout Standard
14685 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14687 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14690 properties, and their options (in addition to
14693 \begin_inset space ~
14699 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14711 \begin_layout Labeling
14712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14726 The possible options are:
14730 \begin_layout Labeling
14731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14736 This is the Roman font family.
14737 Normally a serif font.
14738 It's also the default family.
14748 \begin_layout Labeling
14749 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14753 \begin_inset space ~
14760 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14772 \begin_layout Labeling
14773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14780 This is the Typewriter font family.
14786 arg "font-typewriter"
14792 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14796 \begin_layout Standard
14798 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14799 The general differences of these families are:
14802 \begin_layout Itemize
14804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14809 fonts use characters with serifs.
14810 These are the small
14811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14818 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14819 The following example shows the difference:
14820 \begin_inset Newline newline
14824 \begin_inset Newline newline
14829 text without serifs
14832 \begin_inset Newline newline
14835 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14836 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14843 \begin_layout Itemize
14845 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14850 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14851 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14852 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14855 \begin_layout Itemize
14857 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14870 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14888 \begin_inset Newline newline
14892 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14897 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14908 \begin_inset Note Note
14911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14913 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14914 For more on phantoms see section
14915 \begin_inset space ~
14919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14921 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14931 \begin_inset Newline newline
14940 \begin_layout Labeling
14941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14946 This corresponds to the print weight.
14951 \begin_layout Labeling
14952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14957 This is the Medium font series.
14958 It's also the default series.
14961 \begin_layout Labeling
14962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14969 This is the Bold font series.
14982 \begin_layout Labeling
14983 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14988 As the name implies.
14993 \begin_layout Labeling
14994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14999 This is the Upright font shape.
15000 It's also the default shape.
15003 \begin_layout Labeling
15004 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15014 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15019 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15024 s the Italic font shape
15030 \begin_layout Labeling
15031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15038 This is the Slanted font shape
15040 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15041 , this is different from italic).
15044 \begin_layout Labeling
15045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15049 \begin_inset space ~
15056 This is the Small caps font shape
15063 \begin_layout Labeling
15064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15069 Alters the text color.
15070 Note that not all DVI
15071 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15073 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15076 viewers are able to display colors.
15078 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15084 \begin_inset space ~
15091 , which means that the document default color set in
15093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15094 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15100 \begin_inset space ~
15106 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15108 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15192 \begin_inset Index idx
15195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15204 \begin_layout Labeling
15205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15210 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15211 the language of the document.
15212 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15214 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15217 in blue to indicate the change
15218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15219 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15223 \begin_inset Newline newline
15226 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15228 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15229 When using the spell checking (see section
15230 \begin_inset space ~
15234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15236 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15240 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15241 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15243 \begin_inset Newline newline
15246 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15248 Exclude from Spellchecking
15251 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15254 \begin_layout Labeling
15255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15260 Alters the size of the font.
15262 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15264 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15268 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15271 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15272 document font size.
15273 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15274 the details, but a general description of what
15280 \begin_layout Labeling
15281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15302 arg "font-size tiny"
15308 \begin_layout Labeling
15309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15330 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15336 \begin_layout Labeling
15337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15358 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15364 \begin_layout Labeling
15365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15386 arg "font-size small"
15392 \begin_layout Labeling
15393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15407 It's also the default size.
15411 arg "font-size normal"
15417 \begin_layout Labeling
15418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15439 arg "font-size large"
15445 \begin_layout Labeling
15446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 arg "font-size larger"
15473 \begin_layout Labeling
15474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15495 arg "font-size largest"
15501 \begin_layout Labeling
15502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15523 arg "font-size huge"
15529 \begin_layout Labeling
15530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15551 arg "font-size giant"
15557 \begin_layout Labeling
15558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15563 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 arg "font-size increase"
15589 \begin_layout Labeling
15590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15595 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15615 arg "font-size decrease"
15622 \begin_layout Standard
15627 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15628 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15630 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15631 — use those instead.
15632 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15635 \begin_layout Labeling
15636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15638 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15642 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15648 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15649 change a few other things at the character level
15650 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15651 have text passages being underlined
15655 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15656 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15657 days, when you could not change fonts.
15658 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15659 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15660 because some people
15664 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15671 \begin_layout Labeling
15672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15674 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15681 This is text with emphasize on
15684 This might seem like the same as
15688 , but it is actually a bit different.
15694 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15696 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15697 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15701 \begin_layout Labeling
15702 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15704 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15709 Don't use underlining.
15714 \begin_layout Labeling
15715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15717 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15721 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15740 arg "font-underline"
15746 \begin_inset Newline newline
15750 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15753 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15754 when you could not change fonts.
15755 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15756 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15757 because some people
15761 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15766 \begin_layout Labeling
15767 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15771 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15773 \begin_inset space ~
15782 This is text with Double under
15783 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15785 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15794 arg "font-underunderline"
15798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15800 \begin_inset Newline newline
15803 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15804 about double underbar
15809 \begin_layout Labeling
15810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15816 \begin_inset space ~
15825 This is text with Wavy under
15826 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15828 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15837 arg "font-underwave"
15841 \begin_inset Newline newline
15844 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15845 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15846 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15851 \begin_layout Labeling
15852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15859 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15865 \begin_layout Labeling
15866 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15873 Don't use strikethrough.
15876 \begin_layout Labeling
15877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15881 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15887 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15897 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15898 Single strikethrough
15906 arg "font-strikeout"
15910 \begin_inset Newline newline
15913 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15914 changed in the meantime.
15917 \begin_layout Labeling
15918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15920 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15924 \begin_inset space ~
15928 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15930 \begin_inset space ~
15934 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15944 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15950 \begin_inset Newline newline
15953 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15957 \begin_layout Standard
15959 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15960 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15961 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15962 \begin_inset space ~
15966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15968 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15975 \begin_layout Itemize
15977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15984 This is text with emphasize on
15989 \begin_layout Itemize
15993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16000 This is text with Noun on.
16002 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16009 , this is a logical attribute.
16010 Normally it's equivalent to
16013 \begin_inset space ~
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16025 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16027 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16032 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16033 chosen a new character style
16034 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16035 applied a text property
16038 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16041 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16043 \begin_inset space ~
16046 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16054 arg "dialog-show character"
16062 arg "dialog-show character"
16065 ) dialog, the settings are
16066 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16070 You can activate the
16071 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16074 last applied properties
16076 by using the toolbar button
16079 arg "textstyle-apply"
16083 The button lets you apply
16084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16085 your custom character style
16086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16089 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16091 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16092 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16093 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16094 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16099 \begin_layout Standard
16100 To completely reset the
16101 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16103 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16104 text properties of a selection
16106 to the default, use
16107 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16109 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16119 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16124 from the menu of the toolbar button
16127 arg "textstyle-apply"
16134 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16135 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16136 you just set the shape to
16137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16155 \begin_inset space ~
16169 \begin_layout Standard
16171 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16172 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16180 \begin_inset space ~
16192 \begin_layout Itemize
16194 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16207 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16225 \begin_inset Newline newline
16229 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16243 \begin_inset Note Note
16246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16247 For more on phantoms see section
16248 \begin_inset space ~
16252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16254 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16264 \begin_inset Newline newline
16270 \begin_layout Itemize
16272 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16277 fonts use characters with serifs.
16278 These are the small
16279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16286 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16287 The following example shows the difference:
16288 \begin_inset Newline newline
16292 \begin_inset Newline newline
16297 text without serifs
16300 \begin_inset Newline newline
16303 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16304 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16311 \begin_layout Itemize
16313 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16318 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16319 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16320 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16325 \begin_layout Standard
16327 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16335 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16336 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16339 \begin_inset space ~
16344 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16345 the property to be removed.
16346 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16347 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16348 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16366 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16367 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16375 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16379 \begin_inset space ~
16384 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16395 If you, for example, set
16396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16414 \begin_inset space ~
16419 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16428 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16433 \begin_layout Standard
16435 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16438 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16439 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16442 \begin_layout Section
16443 Printing and Previewing
16446 \begin_layout Subsection
16450 \begin_layout Standard
16451 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16452 using \SpecialChar LyX
16453 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16454 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16455 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16456 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16458 Additional Features
16463 \begin_layout Standard
16465 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16468 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16469 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16470 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16473 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16474 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16475 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16476 to turn your writing into printable output.
16477 This happens in two stages:
16480 \begin_layout Enumerate
16481 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16482 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16484 a file with the extension,
16485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16499 \begin_layout Enumerate
16500 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16501 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16502 to use the commands in the
16506 file to produce printable output.
16509 \begin_layout Subsection
16510 Output file formats
16511 \begin_inset Index idx
16514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16523 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16531 Simple text (ASCII)
16532 \begin_inset Index idx
16535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16536 File formats ! ASCII
16544 \begin_layout Standard
16545 This file type has the extension
16546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16558 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16562 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16569 \begin_layout Standard
16570 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16572 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16573 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16575 \begin_inset space ~
16581 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16582 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16583 bibliography (section
16584 \begin_inset space ~
16588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16590 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16595 If your document includes such material, use
16597 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16598 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16600 \begin_inset space ~
16604 \begin_inset space ~
16608 \begin_inset space ~
16616 \begin_inset space ~
16620 \begin_inset space ~
16626 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16627 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16633 \begin_inset Index idx
16636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16637 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16646 \begin_layout Standard
16647 This file type has the extension
16648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16659 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16662 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16663 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16664 -Errors or to process it manually
16665 with console commands.
16666 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16667 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16668 's temporary directory whenever you
16669 view or export your document.
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16673 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16674 -file using the menu
16676 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16677 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16681 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16682 export variants are explained in section
16683 \begin_inset space ~
16687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16689 reference "subsec:Export"
16696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16698 \begin_inset Index idx
16701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16710 \begin_layout Standard
16711 This file type has the extension
16712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16732 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16733 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16734 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16738 \begin_layout Standard
16739 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16740 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16741 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16742 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16743 when you view the DVI.
16744 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16747 \begin_layout Standard
16748 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16750 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16751 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16756 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16757 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16759 \begin_inset space ~
16765 The latter option uses the program
16767 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16773 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16776 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16777 font access (see section
16778 \begin_inset space ~
16782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16784 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16789 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16790 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16797 \begin_inset Index idx
16800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16801 File formats ! PostScript
16809 \begin_layout Standard
16810 This file type has the extension
16811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16823 PostScript was developed by the company
16827 as a printer language.
16828 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16830 PostScript can be seen as a
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16834 programming language
16835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16838 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16843 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16850 \begin_inset Index idx
16853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16855 packages ! pstricks
16865 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16868 \begin_layout Standard
16869 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16873 Encapsulated PostScript
16874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16877 (EPS, file extension
16878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16890 As \SpecialChar LyX
16891 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16892 convert them in the background to EPS.
16893 If, for example, you have 50
16894 \begin_inset space ~
16897 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16899 \begin_inset space ~
16902 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16903 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16905 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16906 EPS to avoid this problem.
16909 \begin_layout Standard
16910 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16912 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16913 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16921 \begin_inset Index idx
16924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16931 \begin_inset Index idx
16934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16943 \begin_layout Standard
16944 This file type has the extension
16945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16961 Portable Document Format
16962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16969 was derived from PostScript.
16970 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16979 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16980 looks exactly the same.
16983 \begin_layout Standard
16984 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16988 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16992 (JPG, file extension
16993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17020 Portable Network Graphics
17021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17024 (PNG, file extension
17025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17037 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17038 converts them in the
17039 background to one of these formats.
17040 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17041 will slow down your workflow.
17042 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17045 \begin_layout Standard
17046 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17048 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17054 \begin_layout Description
17056 \begin_inset space ~
17059 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17063 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17066 \begin_layout Description
17068 \begin_inset space ~
17075 ) This uses the program
17077 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17080 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17083 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17086 is a new engine, derived from
17090 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17091 access (see section
17092 \begin_inset space ~
17096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17098 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17103 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17104 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17109 \begin_layout Description
17111 \begin_inset space ~
17118 ) This uses the program
17123 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17129 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17130 font access (see section
17131 \begin_inset space ~
17135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17137 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17142 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17143 vertically written Japanese.
17146 \begin_layout Description
17148 \begin_inset space ~
17151 (cropped) This is the same as
17154 \begin_inset space ~
17159 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17160 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17161 to generate good-looking
17162 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17165 \begin_layout Description
17167 \begin_inset space ~
17170 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17174 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17178 \begin_layout Description
17180 \begin_inset space ~
17183 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17187 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17188 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17192 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17193 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17196 \begin_layout Standard
17200 \begin_inset space ~
17209 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17210 works without problems.
17211 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17212 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17216 \begin_inset space ~
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17229 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17239 \begin_inset Index idx
17242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17243 FileFormats ! XHTML
17249 \begin_inset Index idx
17252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17261 \begin_layout Standard
17262 This file type has the extension
17263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17275 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17276 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17277 When \SpecialChar LyX
17278 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17279 suitable for the purpose.
17280 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17283 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17286 between different formats, which are described in section
17288 Math Output in XHTML
17293 \begin_inset space ~
17301 \begin_layout Standard
17302 XHTML output remains
17303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17310 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17311 features are supported yet.
17315 and the World Wide Web
17319 Additional Features
17321 manual, for more information.
17324 \begin_layout Standard
17325 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17327 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17328 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17334 \begin_layout Subsection
17336 \begin_inset Index idx
17339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17348 \begin_layout Standard
17349 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17350 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17359 or use the toolbar button
17366 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17367 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17368 \begin_inset space ~
17372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17374 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17378 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17380 \begin_inset space ~
17384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17386 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17391 Further output formats can be selected via
17393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17394 View (Other Formats)
17396 or the toolbar button
17405 \begin_layout Standard
17406 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17407 viewer window using the menu
17409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17415 Update (Other Formats)
17420 \begin_layout Standard
17421 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17424 To have a real output, export your document.
17427 \begin_layout Section
17428 A few Words about Typography
17429 \begin_inset Index idx
17432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17441 \begin_layout Subsection
17442 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17443 \begin_inset Index idx
17446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17453 \begin_inset Index idx
17456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17465 \begin_layout Standard
17466 In \SpecialChar LyX
17468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17479 symbol comes in four variants: the
17496 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17502 \begin_layout Standard
17503 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17513 height_special "totalheight"
17518 backgroundcolor "none"
17521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17522 \begin_inset Tabular
17523 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17524 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17525 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17526 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17527 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17528 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17529 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17558 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17597 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17598 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17620 system key combination
17624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17625 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17637 and the em dash with
17640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17653 is the Mac label for the right
17664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17677 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17700 system key combination or
17701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17715 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17728 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17767 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17773 \begin_layout Standard
17774 Dashes can also be inserted with
17776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17778 \begin_inset space ~
17781 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17789 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17790 and 2014 for the en dash).
17793 \begin_layout Standard
17794 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17795 mode and has a length of its own.
17796 Here are some examples:
17799 \begin_layout Enumerate
17800 line- and page-breaks
17801 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17811 \begin_layout Enumerate
17813 \begin_inset space ~
17817 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17827 \begin_layout Enumerate
17828 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17829 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17839 \begin_layout Enumerate
17840 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17844 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17854 \begin_layout Standard
17856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17858 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17859 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17867 \begin_layout Subsection
17868 Dashes and Line Breaks
17869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17871 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17878 \begin_layout Standard
17879 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17880 case and locale, e.
17881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17887 \begin_layout Itemize
17888 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17889 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17892 \begin_layout Itemize
17893 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17897 \begin_layout Itemize
17898 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17899 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17902 \begin_layout Standard
17903 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17904 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17915 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17918 \begin_layout Enumerate
17919 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17920 \begin_inset space ~
17923 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17925 The Elements of Typographic Style
17928 \begin_inset space ~
17931 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17934 \begin_layout Enumerate
17935 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17942 Prevent Hyphenation
17947 \begin_inset space ~
17963 in \SpecialChar TeX
17969 \begin_layout Itemize
17971 \begin_inset space ~
17975 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17985 height_special "totalheight"
17990 backgroundcolor "none"
17993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18002 \begin_layout Itemize
18006 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18016 height_special "totalheight"
18021 backgroundcolor "none"
18024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18028 \begin_inset space ~
18036 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18037 \begin_inset space ~
18040 – sont très utiles.
18043 \begin_layout Itemize
18050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18059 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18063 \begin_layout Standard
18064 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18065 \begin_inset space ~
18068 – in contrast to an overfull line
18069 \begin_inset space ~
18072 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18076 \begin_layout Standard
18077 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18080 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18081 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18082 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18083 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18088 \begin_layout Enumerate
18089 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18090 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18091 or \SpecialChar TeX
18097 \begin_layout Itemize
18101 \begin_inset space ~
18104 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18105 \begin_inset space ~
18108 – sont très utiles.
18112 \begin_layout Enumerate
18113 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18114 \begin_inset Newline newline
18119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18120 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18121 Optional line break
18127 \begin_layout Itemize
18128 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18129 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18130 should be followed by
18131 a line break opportunity.
18134 \begin_layout Standard
18135 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18136 \begin_inset space ~
18140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18142 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18153 \begin_layout Enumerate
18154 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18155 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18156 or en dashes (see section
18157 \begin_inset space ~
18161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18163 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18174 Changes and backwards compatibility
18177 \begin_layout Standard
18178 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18183 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18184 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18193 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18194 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18202 \begin_layout Standard
18203 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18205 \begin_inset space ~
18208 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18210 prevents ligation to dashes.
18212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18219 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18224 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18225 after the input (unless the current text font is
18233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 The behavior was changed since
18235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18250 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18251 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18252 as non-breakable dashes.
18253 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18262 \begin_layout Standard
18265 \begin_inset space ~
18273 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18275 \begin_inset space ~
18278 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18281 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18282 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18283 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18284 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18286 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18290 If you used both literal and
18291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18298 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18300 \begin_inset space ~
18303 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18304 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18307 \begin_layout Subsection
18309 \begin_inset Index idx
18312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18321 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18328 \begin_layout Standard
18329 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18330 but automatically in the output.
18331 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18337 \begin_inset Index idx
18340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18347 following the rules of the document language.
18349 does not hyphenate text in the
18353 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18356 \begin_layout Standard
18358 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18362 font and with unusual constructs, like
18363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18371 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18372 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18373 This is done with the menu
18375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18376 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18378 \begin_inset space ~
18384 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18386 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18390 \begin_layout Standard
18391 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18392 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18403 would then see the hyphen
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18411 as a line break possibility.
18412 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18413 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18417 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18420 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18422 Prevent Hyphenation
18427 \begin_inset space ~
18435 \begin_layout Subsection
18437 \begin_inset Index idx
18440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18450 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18453 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18460 \begin_layout Standard
18461 When \SpecialChar LyX
18462 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18463 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18465 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18471 appropriate amount of space.
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18475 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18477 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18478 gets after another word.
18481 \begin_layout Standard
18482 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18483 not work in all cases.
18485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18496 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18497 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18500 \begin_layout Standard
18501 Here are some examples of
18505 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18508 \begin_layout Itemize
18513 \begin_layout Itemize
18518 \begin_layout Standard
18519 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18522 \begin_layout Itemize
18524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18528 this is too much space!
18531 \begin_layout Itemize
18536 \begin_layout Standard
18537 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18540 \begin_layout Standard
18541 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18544 \begin_layout Enumerate
18548 \begin_inset space ~
18553 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18554 \begin_inset space ~
18558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18560 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18565 \begin_inset Index idx
18568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18569 Spaces ! inter-word
18577 \begin_layout Enumerate
18581 \begin_inset space ~
18586 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18587 \begin_inset space ~
18591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18593 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18598 \begin_inset Index idx
18601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18610 \begin_layout Enumerate
18614 \begin_inset space ~
18618 \begin_inset space ~
18622 \begin_inset space ~
18629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18631 \begin_inset space ~
18636 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18637 This function is also bound to
18640 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18646 \begin_layout Standard
18647 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18650 \begin_layout Itemize
18652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18656 \begin_inset space \space{}
18659 this is too much space!
18662 \begin_layout Itemize
18663 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18667 \begin_layout Standard
18668 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18669 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18671 will take care of this.
18674 \begin_layout Standard
18675 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18679 \begin_inset space ~
18685 feature described in the section
18687 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18692 Additional Features
18697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18699 \begin_inset Index idx
18702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18703 Typography ! Quotation marks
18709 \begin_inset Index idx
18712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18713 Quotation marks | see
18717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 \begin_layout Standard
18745 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18746 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18747 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18757 The keyboard character,
18761 , generates this automatically.
18764 \begin_layout Standard
18765 You can specify what character the
18769 key produces by using the submenu
18775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18779 \begin_inset Index idx
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18783 Document ! Settings
18788 dialog and switching the
18792 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18793 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18795 \begin_inset space ~
18801 \begin_layout Labeling
18802 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18814 \begin_inset space ~
18818 \begin_inset space ~
18822 \begin_inset Quotes els
18826 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18840 \begin_inset Quotes els
18844 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18847 quotation marks (as common, e.
18848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18854 \begin_layout Labeling
18855 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18858 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18862 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18866 \begin_inset space ~
18870 \begin_inset space ~
18874 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18878 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18884 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18888 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18892 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18896 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18899 quotation marks (as common, e.
18900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18906 \begin_layout Labeling
18907 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18910 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18914 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18918 \begin_inset space ~
18922 \begin_inset space ~
18926 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18930 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18936 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18940 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18944 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18948 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18951 quotation marks (as common, e.
18952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18958 \begin_layout Labeling
18959 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18962 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18966 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18970 \begin_inset space ~
18974 \begin_inset space ~
18978 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18982 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18988 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18992 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18996 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19000 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19003 quotation marks (as common, e.
19004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19010 \begin_layout Labeling
19011 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19014 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19018 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19022 \begin_inset space ~
19026 \begin_inset space ~
19030 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19034 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19040 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19044 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19048 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19052 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19055 quotation marks (as common, e.
19056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19059 g., in Switzerland)
19062 \begin_layout Labeling
19063 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19066 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19070 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19074 \begin_inset space ~
19078 \begin_inset space ~
19082 \begin_inset Quotes als
19086 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19092 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19096 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19100 \begin_inset Quotes als
19104 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19107 quotation marks (as common, e.
19108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19114 \begin_layout Labeling
19115 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19118 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19122 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19126 \begin_inset space ~
19130 \begin_inset space ~
19134 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19138 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19144 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19148 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19152 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19156 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19159 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19162 \begin_layout Labeling
19163 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19166 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19170 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19174 \begin_inset space ~
19178 \begin_inset space ~
19182 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19186 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19192 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19196 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19200 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19204 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19207 quotation marks (as common, e.
19208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19211 g., in Great Britain)
19214 \begin_layout Labeling
19215 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19218 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19222 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19226 \begin_inset space ~
19230 \begin_inset space ~
19234 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19238 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19244 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19248 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19252 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19256 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19259 quotation marks (as common, e.
19260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19266 \begin_layout Labeling
19267 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19270 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19274 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19278 \begin_inset space ~
19282 \begin_inset space ~
19286 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19290 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19296 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19300 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19304 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19308 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19311 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19316 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19317 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19318 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19319 the inner marks differ).
19327 \begin_layout Labeling
19328 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19331 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19335 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19339 \begin_inset space ~
19343 \begin_inset space ~
19347 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19351 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19357 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19361 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19365 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19369 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19372 quotation marks (as common, e.
19373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19379 \begin_layout Labeling
19380 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19383 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19387 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19391 \begin_inset space ~
19395 \begin_inset space ~
19399 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19403 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19409 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19413 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19417 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19421 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19424 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19427 \begin_layout Labeling
19428 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19429 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19437 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19443 \begin_inset space ~
19447 \begin_inset space ~
19453 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19461 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19465 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19469 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19473 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19477 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19480 quotation marks (as common, e.
19481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19489 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19490 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19498 \begin_layout Labeling
19499 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19500 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19508 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19514 \begin_inset space ~
19518 \begin_inset space ~
19524 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19532 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19536 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19540 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19544 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19548 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19551 quotation marks (as common, e.
19552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19555 g., in North Korea and China)
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19561 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19569 \begin_layout Standard
19570 Inner quotation marks
19574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19575 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19576 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19577 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19585 does not necessarily mean
19586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19594 This is why we call them
19595 \begin_inset Quotes els
19599 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19615 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19617 \begin_inset Quotes els
19621 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19624 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19627 arg "quote-insert inner"
19632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19638 \begin_layout Standard
19639 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19640 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19641 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19642 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19643 If you check the setting
19645 Use dynamic quotation marks
19649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19650 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19653 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19654 they appear in a special color).
19655 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19656 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19661 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19664 \begin_layout Standard
19665 Individual quotation marks (i.
19666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19669 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19670 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19674 \begin_layout Subsection
19676 \begin_inset Index idx
19679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19680 Typography ! Ligatures
19686 \begin_inset Index idx
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19720 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19727 \begin_layout Standard
19728 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19729 print them as single characters.
19730 These groups are known as
19735 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19736 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19738 Here are the standard ligatures:
19741 \begin_layout Itemize
19745 \begin_layout Itemize
19749 \begin_layout Itemize
19753 \begin_layout Itemize
19757 \begin_layout Itemize
19761 \begin_layout Standard
19762 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19765 \begin_layout Standard
19766 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19767 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19775 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19791 To break a ligature, use
19793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19794 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19796 \begin_inset space ~
19803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19814 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19831 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19839 \begin_layout Subsection
19841 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19843 \begin_inset Index idx
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19856 \begin_layout Standard
19859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19860 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19864 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19867 \begin_layout Description
19869 The name of the game.
19872 \begin_layout Description
19874 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19878 \begin_layout Description
19880 The \SpecialChar TeX
19881 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19885 \begin_layout Description
19886 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19887 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19891 \begin_layout Standard
19892 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19898 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19906 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19907 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19908 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19909 converges to the number
19910 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19913 : The actual version is
19914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19922 , the previous one was
19923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19934 \begin_layout Subsection
19936 \begin_inset Index idx
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 \begin_layout Standard
19949 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19950 space between two words.
19951 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19961 for units use the menu
19963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19964 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19966 \begin_inset space ~
19974 arg "space-insert thin"
19980 \begin_layout Standard
19981 Here is an example to show the differences:
19984 \begin_layout Standard
19985 \begin_inset Tabular
19986 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19987 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19988 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19989 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 \begin_inset space ~
20000 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 space between number and unit
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20028 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 half space between number and unit
20053 \begin_layout Subsection
20055 \begin_inset Index idx
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20067 \begin_layout Standard
20068 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20070 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20071 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20072 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20073 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20074 These bits of text became known as
20085 \begin_layout Standard
20086 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20087 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20088 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20089 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20090 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20091 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20092 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20093 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20094 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20095 \begin_inset Newline newline
20103 \begin_inset Newline newline
20111 \begin_inset Newline newline
20114 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20115 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20116 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20118 \begin_inset space ~
20122 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20124 key "latexcompanion"
20130 \begin_inset space ~
20134 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20141 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20142 's page break mechanism.
20145 \begin_layout Chapter
20146 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20149 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20156 \begin_layout Standard
20157 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20160 \begin_inset space ~
20166 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20169 \begin_layout Section
20171 \begin_inset Index idx
20174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20190 \begin_layout Standard
20192 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20195 \begin_layout Description
20198 \begin_inset space ~
20201 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20202 \begin_inset Newline newline
20206 \begin_inset Note Note
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20218 \begin_layout Description
20219 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20220 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20221 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20224 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20225 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20227 \begin_inset space ~
20233 \begin_inset Newline newline
20237 \begin_inset Note Comment
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20250 \begin_layout Description
20252 \begin_inset space ~
20255 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20256 set in the document settings under
20258 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20260 \begin_inset space ~
20266 \begin_inset Newline newline
20270 \begin_inset Newline newline
20274 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20284 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20289 of a comment that appears in the output.
20295 \begin_inset Newline newline
20299 \begin_inset Newline newline
20302 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20305 \begin_layout Standard
20306 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20318 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20321 \begin_layout Section
20323 \begin_inset Index idx
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20335 name "sec:Footnotes"
20342 \begin_layout Standard
20344 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20350 or the toolbar button
20353 arg "footnote-insert"
20365 \begin_inset Graphics
20366 filename clipart/footnote.png
20375 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20376 's representation of your footnote.
20386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20405 label, the box will
20409 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20410 Clicking on the box label again will close
20423 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20424 and click on the footnote
20439 \begin_layout Standard
20440 Here is an example footnote:
20448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20457 \begin_layout Standard
20458 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20459 position where the footnote box is placed.
20460 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20461 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20462 according to the document class.
20464 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20465 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20471 ey are described in the
20474 \begin_inset space ~
20482 \begin_layout Section
20484 \begin_inset Index idx
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20496 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20503 \begin_layout Standard
20504 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20506 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20510 \begin_inset space ~
20515 or the toolbar button
20518 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20544 appearing within your text.
20545 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20546 's representation of your margin
20555 \begin_layout Standard
20556 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20560 \begin_inset Marginal
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20565 This is a marginal note.
20573 \begin_layout Standard
20574 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20575 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20576 pages, right on odd pages.
20579 \begin_layout Standard
20580 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20583 \begin_inset space ~
20591 \begin_inset space ~
20599 \begin_layout Section
20600 Graphics and Images
20601 \begin_inset Index idx
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 \begin_inset Index idx
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20623 name "sec:Graphics"
20630 \begin_layout Standard
20631 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20632 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20635 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20644 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20647 \begin_layout Standard
20648 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20653 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20654 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20656 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20657 \begin_inset space ~
20661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20663 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20670 \begin_layout Standard
20675 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20676 of the image in the output.
20677 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20681 \begin_inset space ~
20685 \begin_inset space ~
20694 \begin_inset space ~
20698 \begin_inset space ~
20702 \begin_inset space ~
20707 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20708 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20716 \begin_layout Standard
20720 \begin_inset space ~
20724 \begin_inset space ~
20729 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20730 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20732 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20737 \begin_inset space ~
20742 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20743 with the image size is printed.
20746 \begin_layout Standard
20747 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20748 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20750 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20753 \begin_layout Standard
20755 \begin_inset Graphics
20756 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20764 \begin_layout Standard
20765 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20766 the image into a float, see section
20767 \begin_inset space ~
20771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20773 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20780 \begin_layout Subsection
20782 \begin_inset Index idx
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20794 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20801 \begin_layout Standard
20802 You can insert images in any known file format.
20803 But as we explained in section
20804 \begin_inset space ~
20808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20810 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20814 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20816 therefore uses the program
20820 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20821 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20822 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20823 \begin_inset space ~
20827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20829 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20836 \begin_layout Standard
20837 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20840 \begin_layout Description
20842 \begin_inset space ~
20845 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20846 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20847 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20851 Graphics Interchange Format
20852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20855 (GIF, file extension
20856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20868 \begin_inset Index idx
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20903 Portable Network Graphics
20904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20907 (PNG, file extension
20908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20920 \begin_inset Index idx
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20955 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20959 (JPG, file extension
20960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20984 \begin_inset Index idx
20987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 \begin_layout Description
21020 \begin_inset space ~
21023 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21025 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21026 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21027 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21028 \begin_inset Newline newline
21031 Scalable image formats can be
21032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21035 Scalable Vector Graphics
21036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21039 (SVG, file extension
21040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21052 \begin_inset Index idx
21055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21087 Encapsulated PostScript
21088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21091 (EPS, file extension
21092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21104 \begin_inset Index idx
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21139 Portable Document Format
21140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21143 (PDF, file extension
21144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21156 \begin_inset Index idx
21159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21174 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21175 result will not be scalable.
21176 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21190 \begin_layout Standard
21191 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21198 \begin_layout Subsection
21199 Grouping of Image Settings
21200 \begin_inset Index idx
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 Images ! Settings grouping
21212 \begin_layout Standard
21213 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21215 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21216 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21218 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21219 need to manually change each of them.
21223 \begin_layout Standard
21224 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21227 \begin_inset space ~
21231 \begin_inset space ~
21243 \begin_inset space ~
21247 \begin_inset space ~
21253 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21254 and checking the name of the desired group.
21257 \begin_layout Section
21259 \begin_inset Index idx
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21278 \begin_layout Standard
21279 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21282 arg "tabular-insert"
21287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21291 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21292 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21293 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21296 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21297 from the rest of the table.
21298 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21299 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21301 Here is an example table:
21304 \begin_layout Standard
21306 \begin_inset Tabular
21307 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21308 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21311 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21312 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21514 \begin_layout Standard
21516 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21517 This corresponds to the
21518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21525 table style listed in the style selection.
21528 \begin_layout Standard
21530 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21531 Other available styles include:
21534 \begin_layout Itemize
21536 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21545 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21549 \begin_layout Itemize
21551 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21552 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21555 \begin_layout Itemize
21557 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21566 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21567 bold top/bottom lines (see
21578 \begin_layout Standard
21580 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21581 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21582 button can be changed in
21584 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21585 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21589 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21593 \begin_layout Subsection
21597 \begin_layout Standard
21598 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21601 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21605 This brings up the table dialog.
21606 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21607 cursor is placed currently.
21608 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21609 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21610 done on all of your selection.
21613 \begin_layout Standard
21614 In addition to the table dialog, the
21617 \begin_inset space ~
21622 helps you in setting table properties.
21623 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21626 \begin_layout Standard
21630 \begin_inset space ~
21635 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21636 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21637 current cell respectively.
21638 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21640 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21641 of text, see section
21642 \begin_inset space ~
21646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21648 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21655 \begin_layout Standard
21656 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21657 using the check box
21666 This will merge the cells to
21670 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21671 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21672 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21673 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21674 in the last row without the upper border:
21677 \begin_layout Standard
21679 \begin_inset Tabular
21680 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21681 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21683 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21684 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 \begin_layout Standard
21817 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21818 -arguments for the table.
21819 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21820 explained in the chapter
21827 \begin_inset space ~
21833 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21834 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21835 but are visible in the output.
21838 \begin_layout Standard
21839 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21847 Most DVI-viewers are
21851 able to display rotations.
21859 \begin_layout Standard
21864 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21869 adds lines for all cell borders.
21872 \begin_layout Subsection
21874 \begin_inset Index idx
21877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 Tables ! Multi-page
21884 \begin_inset Index idx
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 \begin_layout Standard
21897 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21900 \begin_inset space ~
21904 \begin_inset space ~
21912 \begin_inset space ~
21917 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21918 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21921 \begin_layout Description
21926 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21927 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21928 Except for the first page, if
21931 \begin_inset space ~
21939 \begin_layout Description
21943 \begin_inset space ~
21948 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21949 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21952 \begin_layout Description
21957 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21958 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21959 except for the last page, if
21962 \begin_inset space ~
21970 \begin_layout Description
21974 \begin_inset space ~
21979 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21980 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21983 \begin_layout Description
21984 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21985 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21991 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21994 \begin_inset space ~
22002 \begin_layout Standard
22003 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22004 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22005 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22011 In this context, first means first in this order:
22014 \begin_inset space ~
22026 \begin_inset space ~
22031 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22034 \begin_layout Standard
22036 \begin_inset Tabular
22037 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22038 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22039 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22040 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22041 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22042 <row endfirsthead="true">
22043 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22054 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22073 <row endfirsthead="true">
22074 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22106 <row endhead="true">
22107 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22137 <row endhead="true">
22138 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22149 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <row endfoot="true">
22171 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22191 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23163 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23223 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23347 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23471 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23502 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23533 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23564 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23595 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23719 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23750 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23812 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23843 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23874 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23936 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24029 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 <row endlastfoot="true">
24153 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 \begin_layout Subsection
24192 \begin_inset Index idx
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24204 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24211 \begin_layout Standard
24212 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24213 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24214 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24215 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24219 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24222 \begin_layout Standard
24223 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24224 for the column in the table dialog.
24225 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24226 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24230 \begin_layout Standard
24232 \begin_inset Tabular
24233 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24234 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24235 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24236 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24237 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 This is longer now.
24387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24438 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24439 This is longer now.
24444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 \begin_layout Standard
24471 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24472 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24477 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24478 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24484 Selection with the mouse or with
24488 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24489 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24490 the selection from outside the table.
24493 \begin_layout Section
24495 \begin_inset Index idx
24498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24514 \begin_layout Subsection
24518 \begin_layout Standard
24519 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24520 have a fixed location.
24522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24529 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24537 \begin_inset space ~
24542 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24543 too many notes on the current page.
24546 \begin_layout Standard
24547 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24548 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24549 and pages without text.
24550 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24551 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24552 Floats are therefore numbered.
24553 Referencing is described in section
24554 \begin_inset space ~
24558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24560 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24567 \begin_layout Standard
24568 To insert a float, use the menu
24570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24574 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24575 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24577 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24578 \begin_inset Index idx
24581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24587 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24588 paragraph within the float.
24589 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24590 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24591 left-clicking on the box label.
24592 A closed float box looks like this:
24593 \begin_inset Graphics
24594 filename clipart/float.png
24599 – a gray button with a red label.
24602 \begin_layout Standard
24603 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24605 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24608 \begin_layout Subsection
24610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24612 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24617 \begin_inset Index idx
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24621 Floats ! Figure floats
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24631 \begin_inset space ~
24635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24637 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24641 was created using the menu
24643 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24644 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24650 arg "float-insert figure"
24654 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24663 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24667 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24668 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24670 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24672 \begin_inset space ~
24680 arg "layout-paragraph"
24686 \begin_layout Standard
24687 \begin_inset Float figure
24694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 \begin_inset Graphics
24697 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24707 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24712 name "fig:A-star-in"
24729 \begin_layout Standard
24730 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24731 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24742 ) and refer to it using the menu
24744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24750 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24754 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24755 vague references like
24756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24763 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24764 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24774 For more about cross-references, see section
24775 \begin_inset space ~
24779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24781 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24788 \begin_layout Standard
24789 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24790 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24791 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24792 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24793 as described in section
24794 \begin_inset space ~
24798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24800 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24806 \begin_inset space ~
24810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24812 reference "fig:Two-images"
24816 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24817 You can also set the images one below the other.
24819 \begin_inset space ~
24823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24825 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24832 reference "fig:Star"
24836 are the subfigures.
24839 \begin_layout Standard
24840 \begin_inset Float figure
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24848 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24852 \begin_inset Float figure
24859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24860 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24865 name "fig:Undefinable"
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24878 \begin_inset Graphics
24879 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24891 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24895 \begin_inset Float figure
24902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24903 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24921 \begin_inset Graphics
24922 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24934 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24946 name "fig:Two-images"
24963 \begin_layout Subsection
24965 \begin_inset Index idx
24968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24969 Floats ! Table floats
24977 \begin_layout Standard
24978 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24981 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24984 or the toolbar button
24987 arg "float-insert table"
24991 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24992 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24993 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24995 \begin_inset space ~
24999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25001 reference "tab:Table-float"
25008 \begin_layout Standard
25009 \begin_inset Float table
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25017 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25022 name "tab:Table-float"
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 \begin_inset Tabular
25037 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25038 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25189 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25192 \end{array}\right]$
25200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25213 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25234 \begin_layout Subsection
25236 \begin_inset Index idx
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 \begin_layout Standard
25250 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25251 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25252 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25254 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25262 \begin_inset space ~
25270 \begin_layout Section
25272 \begin_inset Index idx
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25284 \begin_layout Standard
25286 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25288 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25289 \begin_inset space \space{}
25296 \begin_layout Standard
25297 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25298 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25304 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25305 and its alignment within the page.
25308 \begin_layout Standard
25310 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25320 height_special "totalheight"
25325 backgroundcolor "none"
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 This is a minipage.
25332 The text is set in an italic style.
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25339 another formatting.
25347 \begin_layout Standard
25348 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25351 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25355 as described in section
25356 \begin_inset space ~
25360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25362 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25367 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25373 \begin_layout Standard
25374 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25384 height_special "totalheight"
25389 backgroundcolor "none"
25392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25393 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25394 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25400 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25404 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25414 height_special "totalheight"
25419 backgroundcolor "none"
25422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25423 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25424 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25432 \begin_layout Standard
25433 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25439 \begin_layout Standard
25440 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25442 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25449 \begin_inset space ~
25457 \begin_layout Chapter
25458 Mathematical Formulas
25459 \begin_inset Index idx
25462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 \begin_inset Index idx
25472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25503 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25510 \begin_layout Standard
25511 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25516 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25519 \begin_layout Section
25521 \begin_inset Index idx
25524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25533 \begin_layout Standard
25534 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25547 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25549 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25550 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25551 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25559 \begin_layout Standard
25560 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25564 \begin_inset space ~
25569 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25572 \begin_layout Standard
25573 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25574 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25577 \begin_layout Standard
25578 This is a line with an inline formula
25579 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25585 \begin_layout Standard
25586 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25587 paragraph, like this one:
25588 \begin_inset Formula
25595 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25598 \begin_layout Standard
25600 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25602 For example, typing
25603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25616 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25617 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25621 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25624 \begin_inset space ~
25632 \begin_layout Subsection
25633 Navigating in Formulas
25634 \begin_inset Index idx
25637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25646 \begin_layout Standard
25647 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25648 achieved with the arrow keys.
25650 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25651 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25656 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25657 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25661 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25665 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25668 \end{array}\right]$
25676 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25681 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25682 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25685 \begin_layout Standard
25690 , printed in this document as
25691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25695 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25702 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25703 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25704 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25709 For example, if you want
25710 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25718 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25728 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25732 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25737 , since in the latter case only the
25740 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25745 will be under the square root sign:
25746 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25752 \begin_layout Standard
25753 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25755 \begin_inset Formula
25757 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25766 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25767 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25770 \begin_layout Subsection
25774 \begin_layout Standard
25775 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25776 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25780 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25781 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25782 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25783 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25784 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25788 \begin_layout Subsection
25789 Exponents and Subscripts
25790 \begin_inset Index idx
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25800 \begin_inset Index idx
25803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25812 \begin_layout Standard
25813 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25816 arg "math-superscript"
25822 arg "math-subscript"
25825 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25827 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25830 , type in a formula
25833 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25843 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25849 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25853 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25859 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25865 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25874 , you have to use an extra
25878 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25879 For example, if you want
25880 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25886 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25892 Subscripts are similar: To get
25893 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25899 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25907 \begin_layout Subsection
25909 \begin_inset Index idx
25912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 \begin_layout Standard
25922 Create a fraction either with the command
25928 or by using the icon
25931 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25937 \begin_inset space ~
25943 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25944 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25945 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25950 To move back up, press
25955 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25956 \begin_inset Formula
25958 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25961 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25969 \begin_layout Subsection
25971 \begin_inset Index idx
25974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25983 \begin_layout Standard
25984 Roots can be created using the
25987 \begin_inset space ~
25995 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26001 arg "math-insert \\root"
26023 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26029 always produces a square root.
26032 \begin_layout Subsection
26033 Operators with Limits
26034 \begin_inset Index idx
26037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26044 \begin_inset Index idx
26047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26056 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26063 \begin_layout Standard
26065 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26069 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26072 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26073 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26074 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26075 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26076 The sum operator will automatically place its
26077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26084 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26086 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26090 \begin_inset Formula
26092 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26097 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26101 \begin_layout Standard
26102 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26104 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26105 behind the operator and using the menu
26107 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26108 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26110 \begin_inset space ~
26114 \begin_inset space ~
26128 \begin_layout Standard
26129 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26138 \begin_inset Index idx
26141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 \begin_inset Formula
26150 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26155 which will place the
26156 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26168 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26169 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26175 \begin_layout Standard
26176 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26183 Have a look at section
26184 \begin_inset space ~
26188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26190 reference "subsec:Functions"
26194 for an explanation of function macros.
26197 \begin_layout Subsection
26199 \begin_inset Index idx
26202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26211 \begin_layout Standard
26212 Most math symbols can be found in the
26215 \begin_inset space ~
26220 under one of several categories; including
26237 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26242 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26243 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26244 don't have to use the
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26252 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26254 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26257 \begin_layout Subsection
26259 \begin_inset Index idx
26262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26271 \begin_layout Standard
26272 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26278 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26284 \begin_inset space ~
26292 arg "math-insert \\space"
26296 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26297 For example, the sequence
26302 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26305 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26307 \begin_inset Graphics
26308 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26313 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26314 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26315 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26316 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26317 , because they are negative
26319 Here are two examples:
26322 \begin_layout Standard
26332 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26338 \begin_layout Standard
26348 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26354 \begin_layout Subsection
26356 \begin_inset Index idx
26359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26368 name "subsec:Functions"
26375 \begin_layout Standard
26379 \begin_inset space ~
26384 contains under the button
26387 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26390 a number of function macros, such as
26391 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26395 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26403 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26410 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26411 avoid confusions, because
26412 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26416 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26425 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26429 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26435 \begin_layout Standard
26436 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26437 are placed, as described in section
26438 \begin_inset space ~
26442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26444 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26451 \begin_layout Subsection
26453 \begin_inset Index idx
26456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26465 \begin_layout Standard
26466 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26468 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26469 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26470 commands, for example, to enter
26471 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26474 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26475 Our example is entered by typing
26480 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26487 \begin_inset space ~
26491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26493 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26497 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26500 \begin_layout Standard
26501 \begin_inset Float table
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26509 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26514 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26518 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26528 \begin_inset Tabular
26529 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26530 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26531 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26532 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26533 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26617 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26671 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26725 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26779 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26833 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26887 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26941 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26995 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27049 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27094 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27115 \begin_layout Standard
27116 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27119 \begin_inset space ~
27127 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27130 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27134 \begin_layout Section
27135 Brackets and Delimiters
27136 \begin_inset Index idx
27139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27146 \begin_inset Index idx
27149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27158 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27165 \begin_layout Standard
27166 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27168 For some purposes, using just the keys
27173 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27174 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27175 toolbar delimiter icon
27178 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27182 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27183 \begin_inset Formula
27185 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27193 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27194 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27198 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27201 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27207 \begin_inset Formula
27209 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27217 \begin_layout Standard
27218 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27219 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27223 \begin_layout Standard
27224 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27225 left side and right side.
27226 If you use the option
27229 \begin_inset space ~
27234 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27235 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27237 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27242 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27243 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27246 \begin_layout Standard
27247 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27248 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27249 is to go inside the brackets.
27250 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27255 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27256 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27257 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27261 arg "math-delim ( )"
27267 \begin_layout Section
27268 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27269 \begin_inset Index idx
27272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27279 \begin_inset Index idx
27282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 \begin_inset Index idx
27292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27293 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27301 \begin_layout Standard
27302 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27306 \begin_inset space ~
27314 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27318 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27319 Here is an example:
27320 \begin_inset Formula
27322 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27331 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27332 \begin_inset space ~
27336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27338 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27343 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27344 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27345 This alignment is set in the box
27350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27399 for every column as default.
27400 For example, the sequence
27401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27412 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27413 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27414 corresponds to the relevant column.
27415 The result will look like this:
27416 \begin_inset Formula
27419 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27420 column & has & has\,right\\
27421 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27430 \begin_layout Standard
27431 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27434 arg "newline-insert newline"
27437 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27438 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27440 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27443 or the math toolbar.
27446 \begin_layout Standard
27447 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27448 It can be created with the menu
27450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27451 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27453 \begin_inset space ~
27465 Here is an example:
27466 \begin_inset Formula
27480 \begin_layout Standard
27481 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27484 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27487 arg "newline-insert newline"
27491 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27496 arg "newline-insert newline"
27499 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27507 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27508 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27509 A new row is created by every further entry of
27512 arg "newline-insert newline"
27516 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27517 Here is an example:
27518 \begin_inset Formula
27520 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27521 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27526 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27527 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27528 \begin_inset Formula
27530 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27538 \begin_layout Standard
27539 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27546 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27547 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27550 reference "eq:asquared"
27555 The other types are described in section
27556 \begin_inset space ~
27560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27562 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27569 \begin_layout Section
27570 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27571 \begin_inset Index idx
27574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27575 Math ! Formula numbering
27581 \begin_inset Index idx
27584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27585 Math ! Referencing formulas
27591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27593 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27600 \begin_layout Standard
27601 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27604 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27606 \begin_inset space ~
27610 \begin_inset space ~
27618 arg "math-number-toggle"
27622 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27623 within parentheses.
27624 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27625 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27626 the document class.
27627 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27628 separated by a dot:
27629 \begin_inset Formula
27639 arg "math-number-toggle"
27642 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27643 You can only number displayed formulas.
27646 \begin_layout Standard
27647 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27650 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27652 \begin_inset space ~
27656 \begin_inset space ~
27664 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27667 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27668 \begin_inset Formula
27671 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27677 To number all lines use the shortcut
27680 arg "math-number-toggle"
27686 \begin_layout Standard
27687 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27690 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27691 A label is inserted with the menu
27693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27702 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27703 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27704 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27716 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27717 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27718 We inserted in the following example the label
27719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27726 in the second line:
27727 \begin_inset Formula
27729 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27730 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27735 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27736 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27737 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27741 \begin_inset space ~
27749 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27753 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27754 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27755 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27756 as the formula number:
27759 \begin_layout Standard
27760 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27763 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27770 \begin_layout Standard
27771 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27772 's cross-reference box are described in section
27773 \begin_inset space ~
27777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27779 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27784 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27792 \begin_layout Section
27793 User defined math macros
27794 \begin_inset Index idx
27797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27806 \begin_layout Standard
27808 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27809 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27810 Math macros are explained in section
27813 \begin_inset space ~
27825 \begin_layout Section
27829 \begin_layout Subsection
27831 \begin_inset Index idx
27834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27843 \begin_layout Standard
27844 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27845 To set a font in a formula, use the
27848 \begin_inset space ~
27856 arg "math-insert \\font"
27859 , or enter its command, listed in table
27860 \begin_inset space ~
27864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27866 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27873 \begin_layout Standard
27874 \begin_inset Float table
27881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27882 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27887 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27891 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27901 \begin_inset Tabular
27902 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27903 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27904 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27905 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27937 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27964 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27991 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28024 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28051 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28078 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28112 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28173 \begin_layout Standard
28174 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28182 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28198 \begin_layout Standard
28199 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28200 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28205 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28206 space when you need a space in the box.
28207 Here is an example where
28208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28219 denotes the set of numbers:
28220 \begin_inset Formula
28222 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28230 \begin_layout Standard
28231 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28232 You can, for example, put a character in
28241 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28245 \begin_inset Newline newline
28248 So it is better not to use this feature.
28251 \begin_layout Standard
28252 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28253 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28257 \begin_inset Newline newline
28260 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28266 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28267 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28273 \begin_layout Standard
28280 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28284 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28286 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28287 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28289 \begin_inset space ~
28297 \begin_layout Subsection
28299 \begin_inset Index idx
28302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28312 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28314 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28318 \begin_inset space ~
28322 \begin_inset space ~
28330 \begin_inset space ~
28338 arg "math-insert \\font"
28342 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28343 in black instead of blue.
28344 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28345 Here is an example:
28346 \begin_inset Formula
28349 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28350 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28359 \begin_layout Subsection
28361 \begin_inset Index idx
28364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28373 \begin_layout Standard
28374 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28375 automatically chosen in most situations.
28393 For most characters,
28401 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28402 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28407 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28408 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28409 thinks are appropriate.
28410 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28413 arg "math-insert \\style"
28417 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28418 For example, you can set
28419 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28422 , which is normally in
28431 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28435 The four styles are used in the following example:
28438 \begin_layout Standard
28439 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28443 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28447 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28451 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28457 \begin_layout Standard
28458 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28459 is set in a particular size with the menu
28461 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28463 \begin_inset space ~
28468 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28469 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28470 will be adjusted to correspond.
28471 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28482 \begin_layout Standard
28486 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28492 \begin_layout Section
28493 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28495 \begin_inset Index idx
28498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28505 \begin_inset Index idx
28508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28519 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28520 that are in common use.
28523 \begin_layout Subsection
28524 Enabling AMS-Support
28527 \begin_layout Standard
28528 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28529 the document by selecting the checkbox
28532 \begin_inset space ~
28536 \begin_inset space ~
28540 \begin_inset space ~
28547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28551 \begin_inset Index idx
28554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28555 Document ! Settings
28563 \begin_inset space ~
28569 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28570 -errors in formulas,
28571 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28574 \begin_layout Subsection
28576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28578 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28583 \begin_inset Index idx
28586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28587 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28595 \begin_layout Standard
28596 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28597 provides a selection of different formula types.
28599 allows you to choose between
28620 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28628 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28631 \begin_layout Chapter
28635 \begin_layout Section
28637 \begin_inset Index idx
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28649 name "sec:Cross-References"
28656 \begin_layout Standard
28657 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28658 's strengths is cross-references.
28659 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28661 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28662 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28663 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28666 \begin_layout Enumerate
28670 \begin_layout Enumerate
28671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28673 name "enu:Second-item"
28680 \begin_layout Enumerate
28684 \begin_layout Standard
28685 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28690 or by pressing the toolbar button
28697 A gray label box like this:
28698 \begin_inset Graphics
28699 filename clipart/label.png
28703 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28705 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28740 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28741 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28757 \begin_layout Standard
28758 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28763 or the toolbar button
28766 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28770 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28771 \begin_inset Graphics
28772 filename clipart/reference.png
28776 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28778 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28791 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28795 \begin_layout Standard
28796 As an alternative to
28798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28801 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28806 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28807 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28809 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28821 \begin_layout Standard
28822 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28823 \begin_inset space ~
28827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28829 reference "enu:Second-item"
28836 \begin_layout Standard
28837 It is recommended to use a protected space
28841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28842 described in section
28843 \begin_inset space ~
28847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28849 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28858 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28859 line breaks between them.
28862 \begin_layout Standard
28863 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28866 \begin_layout Description
28867 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28870 reference "fig:Two-images"
28877 \begin_layout Description
28878 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28879 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28891 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28898 \begin_layout Description
28899 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28900 \begin_inset space ~
28904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28905 LatexCommand pageref
28906 reference "fig:Two-images"
28913 \begin_layout Description
28915 \begin_inset space ~
28919 \begin_inset space ~
28922 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28924 LatexCommand vpageref
28925 reference "fig:Two-images"
28930 \begin_inset Newline newline
28933 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28934 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28935 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28936 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28937 it prints “on the next page”.
28938 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28941 \begin_layout Description
28943 \begin_inset space ~
28947 \begin_inset space ~
28951 \begin_inset space ~
28954 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28957 reference "fig:Two-images"
28962 \begin_inset Newline newline
28965 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28971 ; otherwise it behaves like
28975 \begin_inset space ~
28979 \begin_inset space ~
28988 \begin_layout Description
28990 \begin_inset space ~
28993 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28994 \begin_inset Newline newline
28998 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29006 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29016 \begin_inset Index idx
29019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29021 packages ! prettyref
29027 \begin_inset Index idx
29030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29032 packages ! refstyle
29043 \begin_inset Newline newline
29046 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29047 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29050 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29054 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29055 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29063 is the default and preferred because
29067 supports only English documents.
29068 The format is specified by using the command
29080 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29081 preamble of the document.
29082 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29100 \begin_inset Newline newline
29107 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29112 \begin_inset Newline newline
29123 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29124 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29126 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29127 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29132 , you might do so as follows:
29133 \begin_inset Newline newline
29140 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29145 \begin_inset Newline newline
29148 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29149 the package documentation
29150 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29152 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29158 \begin_inset Newline newline
29169 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29176 \begin_layout Description
29178 \begin_inset space ~
29181 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29183 LatexCommand nameref
29184 reference "fig:Two-images"
29191 \begin_layout Description
29193 \begin_inset space ~
29196 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29197 label for the reference:
29198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29199 LatexCommand labelonly
29200 reference "fig:Two-images"
29205 \begin_inset Newline newline
29208 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29209 Code, if you want to issue a command
29210 that \SpecialChar LyX
29216 , then you may want to use the
29219 \begin_inset space ~
29224 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29234 This is the form needed for e.
29235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29239 \begin_inset space \space{}
29246 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29247 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29249 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29253 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29257 \begin_layout Standard
29258 You can only use the style
29262 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29266 is always possible.
29269 \begin_layout Standard
29270 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29271 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29273 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29274 \begin_inset space ~
29278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29280 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29287 \begin_layout Standard
29288 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29292 \begin_inset space ~
29296 \begin_inset space ~
29301 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29302 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29305 \begin_inset space ~
29310 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29311 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29314 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29320 \begin_layout Standard
29321 You can change labels at any time.
29322 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29323 do not need to think about this.
29326 \begin_layout Standard
29327 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29329 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29333 \begin_layout Standard
29334 References are described in detail in the section
29335 \begin_inset space ~
29345 \begin_inset space ~
29353 \begin_layout Section
29354 Table of Contents and other Listings
29355 \begin_inset Index idx
29358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29365 \begin_inset Index idx
29368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29369 Navigating ! Outline
29375 \begin_inset Index idx
29378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29394 \begin_layout Subsection
29396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29398 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29405 \begin_layout Standard
29406 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29409 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29415 \begin_inset space ~
29421 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29423 If you click on it, the
29427 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29428 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29429 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29431 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29433 \begin_inset space ~
29438 that is described in section
29439 \begin_inset space ~
29443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29445 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29452 \begin_layout Standard
29453 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29454 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29456 \begin_inset space ~
29460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29462 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29466 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29468 \begin_inset space ~
29472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29474 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29478 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29480 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29483 \begin_layout Subsection
29484 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29487 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29494 \begin_layout Standard
29495 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29497 You can insert them via the
29499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29503 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29506 \begin_layout Section
29507 URLs and Hyperlinks
29508 \begin_inset Index idx
29511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29518 \begin_inset Index idx
29521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29530 \begin_layout Subsection
29532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29541 \begin_layout Standard
29542 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29550 \begin_layout Standard
29551 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29553 \begin_inset Flex URL
29556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29558 https://www.lyx.org
29566 \begin_layout Standard
29567 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29573 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29577 \begin_layout Standard
29578 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29586 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29595 \begin_layout Subsection
29597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29599 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29606 \begin_layout Standard
29607 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29612 or with the toolbar button
29619 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29628 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29629 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29630 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29632 name "LyX's homepage"
29633 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29638 , an Email address like this:
29639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29641 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29642 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29648 , or a link to a file.
29653 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29661 \begin_layout Standard
29662 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29675 to the link target.
29678 \begin_layout Standard
29679 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29680 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29681 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29682 the text style dialog.
29683 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29687 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29689 name "LyX's homepage"
29690 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29698 \begin_layout Standard
29699 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29703 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29706 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29710 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29712 \begin_inset Newline newline
29720 \begin_inset Newline newline
29727 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29730 \begin_layout Section
29732 \begin_inset Index idx
29735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29744 name "sec:Appendices"
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29752 Appendices are created with the menu
29754 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29756 \begin_inset space ~
29760 \begin_inset space ~
29766 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29767 as the appendix part of the book.
29768 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29771 \begin_layout Standard
29772 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29773 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29774 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29775 and the subsection number.
29776 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29782 \begin_inset space ~
29786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29788 reference "chap:Credits"
29793 \begin_inset space ~
29797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29799 reference "subsec:Export"
29806 \begin_layout Section
29808 \begin_inset Index idx
29811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29820 name "sec:Bibliography"
29827 \begin_layout Standard
29828 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29830 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29831 \begin_inset space ~
29835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29837 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29844 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29849 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29850 \begin_inset space ~
29854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29856 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29861 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29862 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29863 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29867 using a bibliography database.
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29871 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29872 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29876 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29877 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29878 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29879 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29880 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29883 \begin_layout Subsection
29884 The Bibliography Environment
29885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29887 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29894 \begin_layout Standard
29899 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29901 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29910 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29912 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29913 of ASCII characters only.
29917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29922 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29928 \begin_inset Newline newline
29932 \begin_inset Flex URL
29935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29937 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29947 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29957 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29958 \begin_inset Newline newline
29965 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29966 the number of the entry.
29971 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29980 \begin_layout Standard
29981 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29983 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29986 or the toolbar button
29989 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29993 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29994 containing the available citations.
29995 Select one or more keys from the list and
30005 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30006 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30011 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30012 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30013 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30025 \begin_layout Standard
30029 Companion Second Edition
30032 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30034 key "latexcompanion"
30042 \begin_layout Standard
30043 The \SpecialChar LyX
30044 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30045 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30055 \begin_layout Standard
30056 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30063 \begin_inset Index idx
30066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30074 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
30075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30086 Author A and Author B(Year)
30087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30094 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30096 Then, if you select
30099 \begin_inset space ~
30104 in the document settings
30105 \begin_inset Index idx
30108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30109 Document ! Settings
30116 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30118 \begin_inset space ~
30124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30126 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30133 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30137 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30140 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30142 \begin_inset space ~
30150 arg "layout-paragraph"
30154 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30157 \begin_layout Subsection
30158 Bibliography databases
30159 \begin_inset Index idx
30162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30163 Bibliography ! Databases
30169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30171 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30178 \begin_layout Standard
30179 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30185 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30187 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30188 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30193 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30195 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30196 your working field in a database.
30197 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30198 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30199 list for that document.
30200 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30204 \begin_layout Standard
30205 The database is a text file with the file extension
30206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30217 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30218 The format is explained in
30219 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30226 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30230 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30236 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30237 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30238 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30240 \begin_inset Flex URL
30243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30245 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30253 \begin_layout Standard
30255 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30256 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30257 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30259 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30261 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30262 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30263 Those are addressed by
30268 \begin_inset Index idx
30271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30273 packages ! biblatex
30279 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30280 (although it has been significantly
30281 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30292 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30293 might conversely fail to correctly
30294 handle databases that use specific
30303 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30307 \begin_layout Standard
30308 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30313 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30319 \begin_inset Index idx
30322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30323 Document ! Settings
30335 \begin_inset space ~
30340 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30349 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30351 \begin_inset Index idx
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30355 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30364 \begin_layout Standard
30365 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30373 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30375 \begin_inset space ~
30381 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30382 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30390 Add bibliography to TOC
30392 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30397 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30398 in the document or just the cited references.
30400 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30405 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30406 differ from the encoding of the document.
30411 \begin_layout Standard
30412 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30413 style file is a text file with the file extension
30414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30425 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30426 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30427 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30428 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30430 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30436 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30437 \begin_inset Newline newline
30441 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30443 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30453 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30458 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30462 \begin_layout Standard
30463 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30468 \begin_inset Index idx
30471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30472 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30478 \begin_inset Index idx
30481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30483 packages ! biblatex
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 Accessing a database via
30496 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30504 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30506 \begin_inset space ~
30512 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30513 you cannot select a
30518 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30522 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30525 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30526 As for the styles, note the following.
30531 \begin_layout Standard
30536 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30549 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30550 file (text file with the file extension
30551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30562 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30563 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30565 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30569 \begin_layout Standard
30574 styles are not set in the
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30582 dialog, but in the document settings.
30583 \begin_inset Index idx
30586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30587 Document ! Settings
30592 However, in the dialog in the
30596 field, which is only visible if you use
30600 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30601 example how its heading will appear).
30602 These options are described in detail in the
30607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30617 \begin_layout Standard
30618 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30619 \begin_inset space ~
30623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30625 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30636 Bibliography Processors
30639 \begin_layout Standard
30640 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30641 uses a bibliography processor,
30642 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30643 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30644 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30646 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30647 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30653 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30654 You can do this on a general level in
30656 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30657 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30658 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30661 or for individual documents in
30663 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30664 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30668 The following variants are available by default:
30671 \begin_layout Description
30672 biber a specific, modern processor
30673 \begin_inset Index idx
30676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30683 developed exclusively for
30687 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30693 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30698 makes use of; if you use the
30702 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30709 \begin_layout Description
30710 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30711 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30712 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30716 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30719 \begin_layout Description
30720 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30721 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30725 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30729 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30733 features are supported.
30736 \begin_layout Standard
30737 By default (with the
30743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30744 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30757 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30758 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30759 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30762 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30763 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30776 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30777 -based bibliography styles).
30778 This should suit most needs.
30781 \begin_layout Standard
30782 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30783 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30784 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30789 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30790 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30791 You can adjust it in
30793 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30794 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30795 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30801 \begin_layout Standard
30802 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30803 can add below the selection.
30804 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30805 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30811 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30821 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30825 \begin_layout Standard
30827 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30829 These are explained in detail in section
30831 Customizing Bibliographies
30835 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30840 Additional Features
30845 \begin_layout Subsection
30847 \begin_inset Index idx
30850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30851 Bibliography ! Citation format
30857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30859 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30866 \begin_layout Standard
30867 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30872 \begin_inset space \space{}
30875 numerical citation (as
30876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30883 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30891 ) or author-year citations (as
30892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30901 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30905 \begin_layout Standard
30906 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30910 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30914 \begin_inset Index idx
30917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30918 Document ! Settings
30923 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30929 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30930 labels, is there to use
30933 \begin_inset space ~
30944 \begin_inset space ~
30949 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30952 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30960 With a bibliography database (see
30961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30963 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30970 ) one has in contrary to the
30974 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30975 These style formats are available:
30978 \begin_layout Description
30980 \begin_inset space ~
30983 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30984 -based approached without any additional packages
30985 (simple numeric citations).
30988 \begin_layout Description
30989 Biblatex loads the package
30994 \begin_inset Index idx
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30999 packages ! biblatex
31004 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31006 Biblatex citation style
31010 Biblatex bibliography style
31013 Options to the package
31017 can be entered in the
31024 \begin_layout Description
31026 \begin_inset space ~
31030 \begin_inset space ~
31033 mode) loads the package
31037 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31038 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31050 behavior very closely.
31055 this option has some additional styles.
31060 styles are also supported by this variant.
31063 \begin_layout Description
31065 \begin_inset space ~
31068 (BibTeX) loads the package
31073 \begin_inset Index idx
31076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31083 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31086 \begin_layout Description
31088 \begin_inset space ~
31091 (BibTeX) loads the package
31096 \begin_inset Index idx
31099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31106 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31109 \begin_layout Standard
31118 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31120 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31129 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31131 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31132 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31134 Biblatex citation style
31137 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31143 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31147 \begin_layout Standard
31148 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31149 are available in the
31154 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31155 a name prefix such as
31156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31171 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31176 \begin_inset space \space{}
31180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31191 \begin_layout Standard
31192 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31198 \begin_inset space \space{}
31201 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31207 \begin_inset space \space{}
31211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31223 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31227 \begin_inset space ~
31235 \begin_inset space ~
31241 Here is a simple example where the text
31242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31246 \begin_inset space ~
31250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31253 appears after the reference:
31256 \begin_layout Quote
31258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31261 key "latexcompanion"
31269 \begin_layout Standard
31270 All styles except for
31274 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31284 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31288 \begin_layout Standard
31289 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31290 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31291 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31296 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31297 multi-citation (so-called
31298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31301 qualified citation lists
31302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31308 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31313 dialog will display three columns in the field
31320 \begin_inset space ~
31328 \begin_inset space ~
31336 \begin_inset space ~
31342 If you double-click on an item's
31345 \begin_inset space ~
31353 \begin_inset space ~
31358 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31361 General text before
31367 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31370 \begin_layout Section
31372 \begin_inset Index idx
31375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31391 \begin_layout Standard
31392 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31396 \begin_inset space ~
31401 or the toolbar button
31408 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31409 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31410 by \SpecialChar LyX
31411 as the index entry.
31414 \begin_layout Standard
31415 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31417 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31418 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31420 \begin_inset space ~
31426 A light blue box labeled
31427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31438 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31439 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31443 \begin_layout Standard
31444 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31445 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31446 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31447 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31449 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31451 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31459 \begin_layout Subsection
31460 Grouping Index Entries
31461 \begin_inset Index idx
31464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31473 \begin_layout Standard
31474 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31476 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31477 lists under the entry
31478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31486 First we create the entry
31487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31495 \begin_inset space ~
31499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31501 reference "subsec:Lists"
31506 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31507 \begin_inset space ~
31511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31513 reference "sec:Itemize"
31517 , we insert the command
31520 \begin_layout Standard
31526 \begin_layout Standard
31530 \begin_layout Standard
31536 \begin_layout Standard
31537 for the enumerated list in section
31538 \begin_inset space ~
31542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31544 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31551 \begin_layout Standard
31552 The exclamation mark
31553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31560 marks the grouping levels.
31561 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31562 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31563 If we don't have an index entry for
31564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31571 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31574 \begin_layout Subsection
31576 \begin_inset Index idx
31579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31580 Index ! Page ranges
31588 \begin_layout Standard
31589 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31591 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31592 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31593 an index entry in section
31594 \begin_inset space ~
31598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31600 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31607 \begin_layout Standard
31610 Paragraph environments|(
31613 \begin_layout Standard
31614 and another entry at the end of section
31615 \begin_inset space ~
31619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31621 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31628 \begin_layout Standard
31631 Paragraph environments|)
31634 \begin_layout Standard
31636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31659 respectively start and end the index range.
31660 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31661 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31662 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31663 An example is the index entry
31664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31667 Document ! Settings
31668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31674 \begin_layout Subsection
31676 \begin_inset Index idx
31679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31680 Index ! Cross referencing
31688 \begin_layout Standard
31689 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31690 We referred for example in the index entry
31691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31699 \begin_inset space ~
31703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31705 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31709 ) to the index entry
31710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31717 in the same section using the entry
31720 \begin_layout Standard
31723 GIF|see{Image formats}
31726 \begin_layout Standard
31727 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31729 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31730 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31733 \begin_layout Subsection
31735 \begin_inset Index idx
31738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31739 Index ! Entry order
31747 \begin_layout Standard
31748 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31749 follow the rules for the index order.
31750 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31756 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31758 \begin_inset space ~
31762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31764 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31773 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31774 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31799 \begin_inset Index idx
31802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31803 Dummy entries ! maïs
31809 \begin_inset Index idx
31812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31813 Dummy entries ! maître
31819 \begin_inset Index idx
31822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31823 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31828 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31829 maïs, maison, maître.
31830 To achieve this, we use the command
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31836 previous entry@current entry
31839 \begin_layout Standard
31840 In our case we want to have
31841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31856 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31859 \begin_layout Standard
31865 \begin_layout Standard
31866 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31867 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31869 See the next subsection for an example.
31872 \begin_layout Subsection
31874 \begin_inset Index idx
31877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31878 Index ! Entry layout
31886 \begin_layout Standard
31887 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31888 \begin_inset Index idx
31891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31894 This is an italic dummy entry
31899 You can also format the page number using the character
31900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31907 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31908 -command without a backslash.
31909 We can write for example
31912 \begin_layout Standard
31915 italic page number:|textit
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31919 to get the page number in italic.
31920 \begin_inset Index idx
31923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31924 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31929 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31930 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31948 \begin_inset space ~
31954 Have a look at section
31955 \begin_inset space ~
31959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31961 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31965 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31969 \begin_layout Standard
31970 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31978 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31982 to generate the index, see section
31983 \begin_inset space ~
31987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31989 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31998 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32003 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32004 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32007 key "latexcompanion"
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32023 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32024 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32025 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32026 If so, put the following in the preamble
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32041 \begin_layout Standard
32045 \begin_layout Standard
32051 \begin_layout Standard
32052 in the index entry.
32053 \begin_inset Index idx
32056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32057 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32062 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32063 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32064 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32067 \begin_layout Standard
32068 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32069 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32070 a bold font for all index entries.
32071 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32083 documentation for details,
32084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32086 key "makeindex,xindy"
32094 \begin_layout Subsection
32096 \begin_inset Index idx
32099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32108 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32115 \begin_layout Standard
32116 If the index generation program
32120 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32121 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32125 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32126 distribution, is used.
32130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32135 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32136 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32137 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32138 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32139 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32149 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32151 dialog, see section
32152 \begin_inset space ~
32156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32158 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32163 The available options are listed and explained in
32164 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32166 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32172 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32176 \begin_layout Standard
32177 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32178 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32181 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32182 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32186 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32187 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32190 \begin_layout Subsection
32194 \begin_layout Standard
32195 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32196 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32204 next to the standard index.
32206 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32207 that add this feature.
32214 \begin_inset Index idx
32217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32219 packages ! splitidx
32224 package to generate multiple indexes.
32225 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32231 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32233 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32241 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32242 style, but it also includes
32243 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32244 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32253 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32254 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32257 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32260 and select the option
32262 Use multiple Indexes
32269 already contains the standard index
32270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32278 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32279 also appear as a heading) to the
32283 input field and press the
32288 The new index now also appears in the list.
32289 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32290 label color to the new index.
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32294 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32304 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32305 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32306 are additional features:
32309 \begin_layout Itemize
32310 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32311 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32314 \begin_layout Itemize
32315 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32316 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32321 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32322 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32323 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32324 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32327 \begin_layout Itemize
32332 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32333 code in the name of the index.
32336 \begin_layout Section
32337 Nomenclature/Glossary
32338 \begin_inset Index idx
32341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32348 \begin_inset Index idx
32351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32382 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32389 \begin_layout Standard
32390 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32391 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32392 called nomenclature or glossary.
32395 \begin_layout Standard
32396 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32403 \begin_inset Index idx
32406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32414 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32423 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32427 \begin_layout Standard
32428 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32429 and then use the menu
32431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32437 \begin_inset space ~
32442 or the toolbar button
32445 arg "nomencl-insert"
32450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32461 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32464 \begin_layout Standard
32465 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32466 The first is the term or
32470 that you wish to define.
32475 of the term or symbol.
32478 \begin_layout Standard
32479 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32487 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32488 code for nomenclature entries the option
32492 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32500 \begin_layout Subsection
32501 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32502 \begin_inset Index idx
32505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32506 Nomenclature ! Layout
32514 \begin_layout Standard
32515 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32519 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32526 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32534 \begin_inset Newline newline
32542 \begin_inset Newline newline
32548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32555 character starts/ends the formula.
32556 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32557 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32569 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32579 \begin_layout Standard
32580 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32581 syntax is given in section
32582 \begin_inset space ~
32586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32588 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32599 \begin_inset space ~
32604 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32606 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32611 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32618 in this document is:
32619 \begin_inset Newline newline
32624 dummy entry for the character
32629 \begin_inset Newline newline
32641 \begin_inset space ~
32651 font use the command
32680 \begin_layout Standard
32681 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32686 \begin_inset space \space{}
32690 \begin_inset Newline newline
32706 \begin_inset Newline newline
32709 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32710 This command will make the font of all symbols
32717 \begin_inset space ~
32725 \begin_layout Standard
32726 If the characters |
32727 \begin_inset space \space{}
32731 \begin_inset space \space{}
32735 \begin_inset space \space{}
32739 \begin_inset space \space{}
32743 \begin_inset space \space{}
32746 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32747 code they need to be escaped
32748 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32749 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32750 LatexCommand nomenclature
32751 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32752 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32760 \begin_layout Subsection
32761 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32762 \begin_inset Index idx
32765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32766 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32775 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32776 -code of the symbol
32778 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32780 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32783 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32784 LatexCommand nomenclature
32786 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32794 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32798 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32799 LatexCommand nomenclature
32802 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32808 They will be sorted by
32809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32835 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32838 will be sorted before the
32842 since the character
32843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32850 is considered in sorting.
32853 \begin_layout Standard
32854 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32857 \begin_inset space ~
32862 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32863 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32865 For the example given, you can insert
32869 in this field for the
32870 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32877 will be located before
32878 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32884 \begin_layout Standard
32885 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32890 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32900 \begin_layout Subsection
32901 Nomenclature Options
32902 \begin_inset Index idx
32905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32906 Nomenclature ! Options
32912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32914 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32921 \begin_layout Standard
32926 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32927 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32930 \begin_layout Description
32931 refeq Appends the phrase
32932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32947 to every nomenclature entry, where
32953 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32956 \begin_layout Description
32957 refpage Appends the phrase
32958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32973 to every nomenclature entry, where
32979 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32982 \begin_layout Description
32983 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32986 \begin_layout Standard
32987 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32988 class options list in the
32990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32994 In this document the options
33001 \begin_layout Standard
33002 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33008 \begin_layout Standard
33009 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33010 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33015 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33018 \begin_layout Description
33028 \begin_layout Description
33031 nomrefpage Like the
33038 \begin_layout Description
33041 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33050 \begin_layout Description
33054 \begin_inset space ~
33060 \begin_inset space ~
33065 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33068 \begin_layout Standard
33070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33077 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33078 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33091 \begin_inset Newline newline
33097 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33101 \begin_inset space ~
33113 unskip, see equation
33116 \begin_inset Newline newline
33123 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33124 \begin_inset Newline newline
33130 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33134 \begin_inset space ~
33151 \begin_layout Standard
33152 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33155 \begin_inset space ~
33160 in the document settings under
33163 \begin_inset space ~
33171 \begin_layout Standard
33179 \begin_inset Newline newline
33183 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33187 \begin_inset space ~
33199 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33201 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33202 \begin_inset Newline newline
33209 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33210 \begin_inset Newline newline
33214 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33230 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33235 \begin_layout Subsection
33236 Printing the Nomenclature
33237 \begin_inset Index idx
33240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33241 Nomenclature ! Printing
33249 \begin_layout Standard
33250 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33253 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33269 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33270 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33271 You can choose between these settings:
33274 \begin_layout Description
33275 Default a space of 1
33276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33282 \begin_layout Description
33284 \begin_inset space ~
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33291 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33294 \begin_layout Description
33295 Custom custom space
33298 \begin_layout Standard
33299 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33308 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33316 For example, in order to change the name to
33320 , add the following line to the preamble:
33323 \begin_layout Standard
33336 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33339 \begin_layout Standard
33340 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33341 \begin_inset Newline newline
33356 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33359 \begin_layout Subsection
33360 Nomenclature Program
33361 \begin_inset Index idx
33364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33365 Nomenclature ! Program
33371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33373 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33380 \begin_layout Standard
33386 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33387 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33389 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33394 by adding options, see section
33395 \begin_inset space ~
33399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33401 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33406 The available options are listed and explained in
33407 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33409 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33417 \begin_layout Section
33419 \begin_inset Index idx
33422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33429 \begin_inset Index idx
33432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33433 Document ! Branches
33439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33441 name "sec:Branches"
33448 \begin_layout Standard
33449 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33450 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33451 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33452 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33455 \begin_layout Standard
33456 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33457 allows you to put text into branches.
33458 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33459 To create a branch, either select the menu
33461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33462 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33465 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33475 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33476 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33477 and whether the name of the branch should
33478 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33479 (see below for an example).
33480 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33481 to the name of the other) and to add
33482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33494 \begin_inset space ~
33497 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33498 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33501 \begin_layout Standard
33502 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33503 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33508 where you can choose a branch.
33509 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33513 \begin_layout Standard
33514 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33515 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33518 \begin_layout Standard
33519 \begin_inset Branch Question
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33528 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33536 \begin_layout Standard
33537 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33546 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33554 \begin_layout Standard
33561 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33562 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33565 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33566 Consider for example a file
33567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33574 which has the above branches.
33576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33583 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33607 branch were inactive,
33608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33623 branch was active, likewise
33624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33639 branch was active, and
33640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33643 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33647 if both branches were active.
33648 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33649 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33655 \begin_layout Standard
33656 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33662 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33663 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33667 \begin_inset space ~
33675 \begin_layout Standard
33676 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33680 \begin_layout Standard
33686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33693 branch is deactivated.
33699 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33705 \begin_layout Standard
33706 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33707 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33708 definitions for each branch.
33709 For example you can define for the question branch
33713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33714 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33715 -syntax, see section
33716 \begin_inset space ~
33720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33722 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33734 \begin_layout Standard
33744 \begin_layout Standard
33754 \begin_layout Standard
33755 and for the answer branch
33758 \begin_layout Standard
33768 \begin_layout Standard
33778 \begin_layout Standard
33779 \begin_inset Branch Question
33783 \begin_layout Standard
33787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33815 \begin_layout Standard
33816 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33820 \begin_layout Standard
33824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33852 \begin_layout Standard
33853 Now it is possible to use the
33857 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33864 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33867 commands to obtain conditional output.
33868 Here is an example formula where only the
33875 \begin_inset Formula
33877 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33886 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33894 \begin_layout Standard
33895 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33901 \begin_inset space \space{}
33904 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33906 For this advanced usage, see the
33912 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33917 \begin_layout Section
33919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33921 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33926 \begin_inset Index idx
33929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33938 \begin_layout Standard
33941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33942 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33945 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33947 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33953 \begin_inset Index idx
33956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33958 packages ! hyperref
33963 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33964 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33965 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33966 part of the document.
33970 \begin_layout Standard
33971 The header information in the dialog tab
33975 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33976 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33977 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33978 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33982 \begin_inset space ~
33986 \begin_inset space ~
33991 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33992 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33993 and author entries.
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34005 \begin_inset space ~
34010 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34014 You can specify in the dialog tab
34018 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34023 \begin_inset space ~
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34031 \begin_inset space ~
34036 option allows long links to be split;
34039 \begin_inset space ~
34043 \begin_inset space ~
34047 \begin_inset space ~
34055 \begin_inset space ~
34060 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34063 \begin_inset space ~
34068 colors the different links.
34069 The default colors are:
34072 \begin_layout Labeling
34073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34078 for hyperlinks and URLs
34081 \begin_layout Labeling
34082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34090 \begin_layout Labeling
34091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34099 \begin_layout Standard
34100 but you can change these in the field
34105 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34108 \begin_layout Standard
34111 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34114 \begin_layout Standard
34119 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34120 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34121 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34124 \begin_layout Standard
34129 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34130 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34131 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34141 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34142 when opening the PDF.
34144 \begin_inset space ~
34147 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34151 1 will only display the sections.
34154 \begin_layout Standard
34155 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34156 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34162 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34173 \begin_layout Section
34175 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34179 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34186 \begin_layout Subsection
34189 \begin_inset Index idx
34192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34202 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34209 \begin_layout Standard
34210 As \SpecialChar LyX
34211 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34212 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34213 commands and constructs,
34216 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34217 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34218 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34219 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34220 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34221 cannot support all packages and
34225 \begin_layout Standard
34226 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34227 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34228 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34232 Code box is created by the menu
34234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34236 \begin_inset space ~
34241 or by the toolbar button
34254 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34262 \begin_layout Standard
34263 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34265 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34267 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34272 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34277 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34284 , you can write the command part
34290 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34291 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34295 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34296 Code box behind the word.
34297 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34298 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34303 \begin_inset Graphics
34304 filename clipart/ERT.png
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34316 \begin_layout Standard
34317 This is a line with a
34321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34353 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34354 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34355 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34356 know that the command is finished.
34364 \begin_layout Subsection
34365 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34367 \begin_inset Argument 1
34370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34371 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34378 \begin_inset Index idx
34381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34391 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34398 \begin_layout Standard
34399 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34400 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34401 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34402 uses in the background.
34403 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34404 is based on commands, you can
34405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34413 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34414 any time if you know the right commands.
34415 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34416 is the end of the day.
34417 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34418 all caption labels bold.
34419 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34421 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34428 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34430 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34433 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34444 As result you find that the package
34449 \begin_inset Index idx
34452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34460 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34462 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34465 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34469 \begin_inset space ~
34477 \begin_layout Standard
34482 usepackage[options]{package name}
34485 \begin_layout Standard
34486 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34487 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34488 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34489 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34492 \begin_layout Standard
34493 In your case the package name is
34498 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34503 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34504 So you add the command
34507 \begin_layout Standard
34512 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34515 \begin_layout Standard
34516 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34521 For more commands provided by the
34525 package, have a look at its documentation,
34526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34541 \begin_layout Standard
34542 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34544 For example if you use a
34548 class, you don't need the package
34552 , you can instead write
34555 \begin_layout Standard
34560 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34565 \begin_layout Standard
34566 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34567 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34568 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34575 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34578 \begin_layout Standard
34579 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34580 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34582 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34583 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34584 Code box as described in the previous
34588 \begin_layout Standard
34589 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34590 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34593 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34595 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34610 \begin_layout Standard
34614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34624 \begin_inset Note Note
34627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34628 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34636 \begin_layout Left Header
34637 \begin_inset Argument 1
34640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34660 \begin_inset Note Note
34663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34664 defines the header line as described below
34672 \begin_layout Center Header
34673 \begin_inset Argument 1
34676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34685 \begin_layout Right Header
34686 \begin_inset Argument 1
34689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34710 \begin_layout Left Footer
34711 \begin_inset Argument 1
34714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34735 \begin_layout Center Footer
34736 \begin_inset Argument 1
34739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34751 \begin_inset Newline newline
34755 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34761 \begin_layout Right Footer
34762 \begin_inset Argument 1
34765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34787 \begin_layout Section
34788 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34791 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34796 \begin_inset Index idx
34799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34800 Document ! Header/Footer line
34806 \begin_inset Index idx
34809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34818 \begin_layout Standard
34819 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34823 \begin_inset space ~
34834 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34840 \begin_inset space ~
34846 As a second step add in the menu
34848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34849 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34858 Custom Header/Footerlines
34861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34865 This module offers the following 6
34866 \begin_inset space ~
34872 \begin_layout Description
34874 \begin_inset space ~
34878 \begin_inset space ~
34882 \begin_inset space ~
34886 \begin_inset space ~
34890 \begin_inset space ~
34896 \begin_layout Description
34898 \begin_inset space ~
34902 \begin_inset space ~
34906 \begin_inset space ~
34910 \begin_inset space ~
34914 \begin_inset space ~
34920 \begin_layout Standard
34921 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34922 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34925 \begin_layout Standard
34926 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34927 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34929 \begin_inset space ~
34933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34935 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34939 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34942 \begin_layout Standard
34943 \begin_inset Float figure
34950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34953 \begin_inset Tabular
34954 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34955 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34956 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34958 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34960 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34978 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34989 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35007 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35018 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35022 The normal text on the page goes here.
35023 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35025 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35026 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35031 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35040 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35051 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35069 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35098 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35116 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35121 name "fig:Page-layout"
35125 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35139 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35147 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35151 \begin_inset space ~
35156 is set to “Default”.
35157 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35166 \begin_layout Subsection
35170 \begin_layout Standard
35171 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35172 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35173 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35174 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35176 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35178 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35181 \begin_layout Standard
35182 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35183 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35189 \begin_inset space ~
35197 \begin_layout Description
35200 thepage prints the current page number
35203 \begin_layout Description
35206 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35209 \begin_layout Description
35212 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35215 \begin_layout Description
35218 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35219 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35226 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35229 because it usually goes in a left header.
35232 \begin_layout Description
35235 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35236 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35238 It is normally used in the right header.
35241 \begin_layout Subsection
35242 Default header/footer
35245 \begin_layout Standard
35246 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35247 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35248 footer has the page number.
35249 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35250 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35251 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35254 \begin_inset space ~
35262 \begin_layout Subsection
35266 \begin_layout Standard
35267 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35268 Some pages are different.
35269 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35270 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35271 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35272 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35273 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35277 Header and footer decoration line
35280 \begin_layout Standard
35281 By default, you get a 0.4
35282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35285 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35286 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35298 in the following way:
35301 \begin_layout Standard
35308 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35311 \begin_layout Standard
35312 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35325 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35332 \begin_layout Standard
35333 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35335 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35336 \begin_inset space ~
35340 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35351 Several header/footer lines
35354 \begin_layout Standard
35355 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35356 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35357 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35359 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35377 \begin_inset space ~
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35392 headheight}{height}
35395 \begin_layout Standard
35400 is a size in standard units (e.
35401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35405 \begin_inset space \space{}
35413 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35414 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35415 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35416 logfile with the menu
35418 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35420 \begin_inset space ~
35428 \begin_inset space ~
35433 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35438 \begin_inset Index idx
35441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35443 packages ! fancyhdr
35449 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35450 for your header/footer.
35453 \begin_layout Subsection
35457 \begin_layout Standard
35458 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35459 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35460 This example consists of the following definition:
35463 \begin_layout Description
35465 \begin_inset space ~
35474 , empty optional argument
35477 \begin_layout Description
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35482 Header empty, empty optional argument
35485 \begin_layout Description
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35496 in the optional argument
35499 \begin_layout Description
35501 \begin_inset space ~
35510 in the optional argument
35513 \begin_layout Description
35515 \begin_inset space ~
35528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35532 \begin_inset Newline newline
35536 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35543 in the optional argument
35546 \begin_layout Description
35548 \begin_inset space ~
35557 , empty optional argument
35560 \begin_layout Description
35563 headrulewidth set to 2
35564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35570 \begin_layout Standard
35571 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35572 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35578 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35588 \begin_layout Standard
35589 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35595 \begin_layout Standard
35599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35603 pagestyle{headings}
35609 \begin_inset Note Note
35612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35613 switches back to page style with the default headings
35621 \begin_layout Section
35622 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35625 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35630 \begin_inset Index idx
35633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35640 \begin_inset Index idx
35643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35652 \begin_layout Standard
35654 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35655 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35656 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35659 \begin_layout Subsection
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35664 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35670 \begin_inset Index idx
35673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35675 packages ! preview-latex
35680 (on some systems named simply
35685 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35687 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35694 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35696 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35704 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35705 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35706 -package are automatically
35707 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35711 \begin_layout Subsection
35715 \begin_layout Standard
35716 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35717 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35719 activate the option
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35729 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35739 \begin_inset space ~
35742 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35762 \begin_inset space ~
35767 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35770 \begin_layout Standard
35771 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35776 \begin_inset space ~
35784 \begin_inset space ~
35792 \begin_layout Standard
35793 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35794 and when you finish
35798 \begin_layout Standard
35799 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35807 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35808 generated by activating the option
35811 \begin_inset space ~
35817 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35825 \begin_layout Subsection
35826 Selected document parts
35829 \begin_layout Standard
35830 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35831 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35832 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35833 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35835 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35841 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35842 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35843 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35846 \begin_layout Standard
35847 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35854 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35866 is explained in section
35868 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35883 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35884 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35885 the final rotated boxes,
35886 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35887 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35889 Here is the result:
35892 \begin_layout Standard
35893 \begin_inset Preview
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35904 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35910 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35920 height_special "totalheight"
35925 backgroundcolor "none"
35928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35953 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35959 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35981 \begin_layout Standard
35982 Previewing works also for colors.
35983 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36002 is explained in section
36009 \begin_inset space ~
36022 \begin_layout Standard
36023 \begin_inset Preview
36025 \begin_layout Standard
36029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36048 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36053 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36072 \begin_layout Standard
36073 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36079 \begin_layout Standard
36080 If \SpecialChar LyX
36081 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36082 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36083 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36084 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36085 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36086 the \SpecialChar TeX
36088 If \SpecialChar LyX
36089 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36090 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36092 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36093 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36094 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36097 \begin_layout Subsection
36102 \begin_layout Standard
36103 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36104 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36107 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36114 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36116 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36118 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36119 's main window, then only this selection
36120 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36121 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36122 the source view window.
36127 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36128 ; but note that if you have
36129 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36131 not just the one which is open at the time.
36134 \begin_layout Section
36135 Advanced Find and Replace
36136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36138 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36143 \begin_inset Index idx
36146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36153 \begin_inset Index idx
36156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36165 \begin_layout Subsection
36169 \begin_layout Standard
36170 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36171 allows for searching of complex,
36172 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36174 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36175 The key-features are:
36178 \begin_layout Itemize
36179 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36180 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36181 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36185 \begin_layout Itemize
36186 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36187 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36188 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36189 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36192 \begin_layout Itemize
36193 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36194 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36195 outside of mathematics environments
36198 \begin_layout Itemize
36199 Search may be widened to a specific
36204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36208 \begin_inset space ~
36211 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36212 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36219 \begin_layout Itemize
36220 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36221 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36229 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36232 \begin_layout Subsection
36236 \begin_layout Standard
36237 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36252 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36255 ) or the toolbar button
36258 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36264 Advanced Find and Replace
36269 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36273 \begin_layout Standard
36279 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36283 \begin_inset space ~
36288 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36291 arg "paragraph-break"
36295 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36296 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36300 arg "paragraph-break"
36303 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36307 searches backwards.
36310 \begin_layout Standard
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36319 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36328 \begin_inset space ~
36333 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36337 Searching for mathematics
36340 \begin_layout Standard
36341 Mathematical formulas, such as
36342 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36345 or something more complex like
36346 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36349 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36354 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36355 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36356 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36357 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36367 \begin_layout Standard
36368 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36369 This is done by switching to the
36373 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36378 This way, entering in the
36385 \begin_layout Itemize
36386 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36387 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36390 \begin_layout Itemize
36391 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36392 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36395 \begin_layout Itemize
36396 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36397 of it only within section headings.
36398 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36399 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36403 \begin_layout Itemize
36404 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36405 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36412 \begin_layout Standard
36413 The entries made in the
36417 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36420 \begin_inset space ~
36426 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36430 button or alternatively press
36433 arg "paragraph-break"
36440 while the cursor is in the
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36451 \begin_layout Standard
36452 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36454 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36458 \begin_layout Itemize
36459 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36460 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36468 with its typewriter version
36469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36483 \begin_layout Itemize
36484 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36490 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36502 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36509 (you may want to enable the
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36520 \begin_inset space ~
36525 options and disable the
36533 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36541 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36542 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36546 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36549 , or occurrences of
36550 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36554 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36560 \begin_layout Subsection
36564 \begin_layout Standard
36565 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36570 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36572 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36574 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36584 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36590 This is done with the context menu
36592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36593 Insert Regular Expression
36595 while the cursor is in the
36600 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36601 expression matching rules
36605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36606 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36613 \begin_inset space ~
36616 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36617 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36623 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36624 same text in the document.
36625 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36626 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36629 \begin_layout Enumerate
36630 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36635 editor the fraction
36636 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36640 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36643 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36644 fractions with the given denominator.
36647 \begin_layout Enumerate
36648 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36660 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36665 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36666 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36667 Also, by inserting a
36668 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36671 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36672 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36675 \begin_layout Standard
36676 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36677 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36678 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36681 , and referring back to them through
36682 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36686 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36690 For example, try searching with the regexp
36691 \begin_inset Newline newline
36694 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36697 \begin_inset Newline newline
36700 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36703 \begin_layout Standard
36704 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36707 \begin_layout Standard
36708 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36716 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36717 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36718 sub-expressions is absolute.
36720 \begin_inset space ~
36724 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36727 always refers to the first occurrence of
36728 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36731 in all entered regexps.
36739 \begin_layout Section
36741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36743 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36748 \begin_inset Index idx
36751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36760 \begin_layout Standard
36762 has a built-in spell checker.
36765 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36772 key or the toolbar button
36775 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36778 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36779 beginning of the currently selected text.
36780 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36781 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36782 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36783 scrolled so that it is visible.
36784 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36785 n, if any could be found.
36786 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36790 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36791 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36794 \begin_layout Standard
36795 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36802 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36803 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36805 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36806 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36817 arg "dialog-show character"
36820 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36822 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36826 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36827 can be downloaded from here:
36828 \begin_inset Newline newline
36832 \begin_inset Flex URL
36835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36837 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36843 \begin_inset Newline newline
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36850 files for each language.
36851 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36855 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36856 's installation subfolder
36864 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36866 \begin_inset Newline newline
36869 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36870 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36871 but in most cases these are
36887 is the language code.
36890 \begin_layout Subsection
36894 \begin_layout Standard
36897 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36898 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36900 \begin_inset space ~
36903 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36906 you can set the following things:
36909 \begin_layout Description
36911 \begin_inset space ~
36914 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36915 should use for spell checking.
36916 Depending on your platform,
36926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36927 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36928 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36943 \begin_inset space ~
36946 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36949 \begin_layout Description
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36954 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36955 will always use the given language
36956 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36959 \begin_layout Description
36961 \begin_inset space ~
36964 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36970 \begin_inset space \space{}
36974 This should normally not be needed.
36977 \begin_layout Description
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36983 \begin_inset space ~
36986 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36998 \begin_layout Description
37000 \begin_inset space ~
37003 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37004 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37005 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37006 appear in a context menu.
37007 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37011 \begin_layout Description
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37021 \begin_inset space ~
37024 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37028 \begin_layout Section
37030 \begin_inset Index idx
37033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37042 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37051 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37052 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37062 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37064 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37074 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37076 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37077 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37078 which are available for many languages.
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37082 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37083 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37087 \begin_layout Subsection
37088 Setting up the thesaurus
37091 \begin_layout Standard
37100 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37104 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37109 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37123 For instance, the US English files are named:
37126 \begin_layout Itemize
37130 \begin_layout Itemize
37134 \begin_layout Standard
37143 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37144 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37147 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37148 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37149 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37151 \begin_inset space ~
37156 ) to the path where they are installed.
37160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37161 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37162 ies, typical locations are
37168 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37172 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37176 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37179 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37185 LibreOffice-<Version>
37192 On the Mac, the default location is
37194 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37195 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37196 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37197 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37198 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37199 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37207 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37208 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37209 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37213 \begin_layout Standard
37214 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37215 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37217 \begin_inset Newline newline
37221 \begin_inset Flex URL
37224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37226 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37234 \begin_layout Standard
37235 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37236 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37238 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37239 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37240 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37242 \begin_inset space ~
37247 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37249 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37250 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37257 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37260 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37266 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37269 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37270 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37279 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37280 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37282 \begin_inset space ~
37287 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37290 \begin_layout Subsection
37291 Using the thesaurus
37294 \begin_layout Standard
37295 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37297 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37300 or the toolbar button
37303 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37306 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37308 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37310 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37311 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37312 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37321 ), related terms (such as
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37333 ), compounds (such as
37336 \begin_inset space ~
37345 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37354 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37357 \begin_layout Standard
37358 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37359 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37363 \begin_layout Standard
37364 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37365 the dictionary, such as the above
37369 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37374 \begin_inset space \space{}
37377 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37378 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37379 For example, looking up the word form
37383 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37388 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37393 \begin_inset space \space{}
37404 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37405 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37406 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37409 \begin_layout Section
37411 \begin_inset Index idx
37414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37421 \begin_inset Index idx
37424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37425 Document ! Change Tracking
37431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37433 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37440 \begin_layout Standard
37441 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37442 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37443 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37444 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37448 \begin_inset space ~
37451 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37453 \begin_inset space ~
37461 \begin_layout Standard
37462 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37476 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37477 You can change the color in
37479 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37480 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37482 \begin_inset space ~
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37491 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37497 \begin_inset Index idx
37500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37501 Color ! Change tracking
37506 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37507 's status bar when the
37508 cursor is in changed text.
37509 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37512 arg "changes-merge"
37518 \begin_layout Standard
37519 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37521 \begin_inset Index idx
37524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37533 \begin_layout Standard
37534 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37540 \begin_layout Standard
37541 \begin_inset Graphics
37542 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37550 \begin_layout Standard
37551 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37557 \begin_layout Standard
37558 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37561 \begin_layout Standard
37562 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37568 \begin_layout Standard
37569 \begin_inset Tabular
37570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37571 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37573 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37583 arg "changes-track"
37591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37602 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37622 arg "changes-output"
37630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37641 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37647 \begin_inset space ~
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37660 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37681 Jumps to the next change
37687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37696 arg "change-accept"
37704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37715 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37735 arg "change-reject"
37743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37751 \begin_inset space ~
37754 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37756 \begin_inset space ~
37765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37774 arg "changes-merge"
37782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37793 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37795 \begin_inset space ~
37804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37813 arg "all-changes-accept"
37821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37832 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37838 \begin_inset space ~
37847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37856 arg "all-changes-reject"
37864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37872 \begin_inset space ~
37875 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37877 \begin_inset space ~
37881 \begin_inset space ~
37890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37914 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37916 \begin_inset space ~
37925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37948 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37966 \begin_layout Standard
37967 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37973 \begin_layout Standard
37974 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37994 \begin_layout Standard
37995 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37996 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37997 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37998 the next change after the current cursor position.
37999 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38000 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38001 step to the next change.
38002 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38005 \begin_layout Standard
38006 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38007 to describe a change.
38010 \begin_layout Standard
38011 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38017 \begin_inset Index idx
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38028 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38037 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38041 \begin_layout Section
38042 Comparison of Documents
38043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38045 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38050 \begin_inset Index idx
38053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 Comparison of documents
38062 \begin_layout Standard
38063 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38066 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38070 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38071 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38073 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38075 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \begin_inset space ~
38121 enables the change tracking option
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38128 \begin_inset space ~
38132 \begin_inset space ~
38137 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38140 \begin_layout Section
38141 International Support
38142 \begin_inset Index idx
38145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38146 International support
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38156 with any language you want.
38157 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38158 up \SpecialChar LyX
38160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38162 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38170 \begin_layout Standard
38171 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38172 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38173 \begin_inset space ~
38177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38179 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38186 \begin_layout Subsection
38188 \begin_inset Index idx
38191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38198 \begin_inset Index idx
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38202 Document ! Settings
38208 \begin_inset Index idx
38211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38212 Document ! Language
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38224 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38227 dialog lets you set
38229 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38234 \begin_layout Standard
38239 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38244 \begin_inset space ~
38249 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38250 For details about the different encoding options see section
38251 \begin_inset space ~
38255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38257 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38264 \begin_layout Subsection
38265 Keyboard mapping configuration
38266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38268 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38275 \begin_layout Standard
38276 If you have for example a U.
38277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38280 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38281 can use an alternate keymap.
38282 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38287 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38288 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38289 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38292 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38293 \begin_inset space ~
38297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38299 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38304 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38305 which one you want to use.
38308 \begin_layout Standard
38309 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38310 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38311 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38315 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38316 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38317 one to support the characters you want.
38318 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38325 \begin_layout Chapter
38328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38330 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38337 \begin_layout Standard
38338 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38339 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38340 topic inside the user's guide.
38343 \begin_layout Section
38345 \begin_inset Index idx
38348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38357 \begin_layout Standard
38362 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38365 \begin_layout Subsection
38369 \begin_layout Standard
38370 Creates a new document.
38373 \begin_layout Subsection
38377 \begin_layout Standard
38378 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38379 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38380 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38382 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38383 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38389 \begin_layout Subsection
38393 \begin_layout Standard
38397 \begin_layout Subsection
38401 \begin_layout Standard
38402 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38403 Click there on a file to open it.
38406 \begin_layout Subsection
38408 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38412 \begin_layout Standard
38414 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38415 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38419 \begin_layout Subsection
38423 \begin_layout Standard
38424 Closes the current document.
38427 \begin_layout Subsection
38431 \begin_layout Standard
38432 Closes all opened documents.
38435 \begin_layout Subsection
38439 \begin_layout Standard
38440 Saves the actual document.
38443 \begin_layout Subsection
38447 \begin_layout Standard
38448 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38449 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38453 \begin_layout Subsection
38455 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38459 \begin_layout Standard
38461 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38462 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38468 \begin_layout Subsection
38472 \begin_layout Standard
38473 Saves all opened documents.
38476 \begin_layout Subsection
38480 \begin_layout Standard
38481 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38484 \begin_layout Subsection
38488 \begin_layout Standard
38489 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38490 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38491 It is described in the section
38493 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38498 Additional Features
38503 \begin_layout Subsection
38507 \begin_layout Standard
38508 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38509 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38511 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38512 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38516 \begin_layout Standard
38517 When using the menu entry
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38525 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38533 \begin_inset space ~
38537 \begin_inset space ~
38542 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38543 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38546 \begin_layout Subsection
38548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38550 name "subsec:Export"
38557 \begin_layout Standard
38558 You can export your document to various file formats.
38559 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38561 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38562 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38563 during its configuration.
38566 \begin_layout Standard
38567 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38569 \begin_inset space ~
38573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38575 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38582 \begin_layout Description
38588 \begin_inset space ~
38591 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38593 \begin_inset space ~
38596 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38597 \begin_inset Newline newline
38600 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38601 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38605 \begin_layout Description
38606 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38612 \begin_layout Description
38614 \begin_inset space ~
38617 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38623 \begin_layout Description
38624 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38625 's native DVI-format.
38626 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38627 files paths or file names in your document.
38629 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38636 \begin_layout Description
38637 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38638 in files paths or file names
38641 \begin_layout Description
38643 \begin_inset space ~
38650 ) DVI-format using the program
38652 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38655 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38659 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38667 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38675 \begin_layout Description
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38680 (cropped) the same as
38684 but with cropped page margins.
38687 \begin_layout Description
38689 \begin_inset space ~
38692 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38696 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38701 \begin_layout Description
38705 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38713 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38721 \begin_layout Description
38723 \begin_inset space ~
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38730 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38734 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38742 \begin_layout Description
38746 \begin_inset space ~
38755 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38756 source that is compilable with the program
38758 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38762 \begin_layout Description
38766 \begin_inset space ~
38771 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38772 source, additionally all images used in the document
38773 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38777 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38780 \begin_layout Description
38784 \begin_inset space ~
38789 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38790 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38791 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38799 \begin_layout Description
38803 \begin_inset space ~
38812 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38813 source that is compilable with the program
38819 \begin_layout Description
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38825 \begin_inset space ~
38832 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38833 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38839 \begin_layout Description
38841 \begin_inset space ~
38844 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38845 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38851 \begin_inset space \space{}
38856 \begin_inset space ~
38860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38875 represent the version number)
38878 \begin_layout Description
38880 \begin_inset space ~
38884 \begin_inset space ~
38887 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38888 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38889 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38893 \begin_layout Description
38894 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38895 's internal XHTML engine
38898 \begin_layout Description
38900 \begin_inset space ~
38904 \begin_inset space ~
38908 \begin_inset space ~
38912 \begin_inset space ~
38915 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38920 For the conversion the program
38929 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38932 \begin_layout Description
38933 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38938 \begin_layout Description
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38943 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38945 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38948 For the conversion the program
38957 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38960 \begin_layout Description
38962 \begin_inset space ~
38965 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38966 For the conversion the program
38975 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38978 \begin_layout Description
38980 \begin_inset space ~
38983 (cropped) the same as
38986 \begin_inset space ~
38991 but with cropped page margins
38994 \begin_layout Description
38998 \begin_inset space ~
39003 PDF-format using the program
39007 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39010 \begin_layout Description
39014 \begin_inset space ~
39018 \begin_inset space ~
39026 \begin_inset space ~
39031 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39036 \begin_inset space \space{}
39039 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39043 \begin_layout Description
39047 \begin_inset space ~
39052 PDF-format using the program
39054 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39057 , produces PDF-files directly
39060 \begin_layout Description
39064 \begin_inset space ~
39069 PDF-format using the program
39073 , produces PDF-files directly
39076 \begin_layout Description
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39085 PDF-format using the program
39089 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39092 \begin_layout Description
39096 \begin_inset space ~
39101 PDF-format using the program
39106 , produces PDF-files directly
39109 \begin_layout Description
39113 \begin_inset space ~
39121 \begin_layout Description
39125 \begin_inset space ~
39129 \begin_inset space ~
39134 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39135 and then exported as text using the program
39140 \begin_layout Description
39145 PostScript format using the program
39153 options see section
39154 \begin_inset space ~
39158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39160 reference "subsec:General-output"
39167 \begin_layout Description
39168 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39169 source and also code in the statistical programming
39183 it is possible to use
39187 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39191 \begin_layout Standard
39192 If one of the menu entries
39199 \begin_inset space ~
39208 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39210 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39212 \begin_inset space ~
39216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39218 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39223 \begin_inset Index idx
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39227 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39236 \begin_layout Subsection
39240 \begin_layout Standard
39241 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39242 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39245 \begin_inset space ~
39249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39251 reference "sec:Paths"
39256 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39265 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39266 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39267 's preferences as described in section
39268 \begin_inset space ~
39272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39274 reference "subsec:Converters"
39281 \begin_layout Subsection
39282 New and Close Window
39285 \begin_layout Standard
39286 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39290 \begin_layout Subsection
39294 \begin_layout Standard
39295 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39298 \begin_layout Section
39300 \begin_inset Index idx
39303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39312 \begin_layout Subsection
39316 \begin_layout Standard
39317 Described in section
39318 \begin_inset space ~
39322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39324 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39331 \begin_layout Subsection
39332 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39335 \begin_layout Standard
39336 Described in section
39337 \begin_inset space ~
39341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39343 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39350 \begin_layout Subsection
39354 \begin_layout Standard
39355 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39356 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39359 \begin_layout Subsection
39363 \begin_layout Standard
39364 Selects the whole document.
39367 \begin_layout Subsection
39368 Find & Replace (Quick)
39371 \begin_layout Standard
39372 Described in section
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39379 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39386 \begin_layout Subsection
39387 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39390 \begin_layout Standard
39391 Described in section
39392 \begin_inset space ~
39396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39398 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39405 \begin_layout Subsection
39406 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39409 \begin_layout Standard
39410 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39414 \begin_layout Subsection
39416 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39420 \begin_layout Standard
39422 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39423 Described in section
39424 \begin_inset space ~
39428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39430 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39439 \begin_layout Subsection
39441 \begin_inset Index idx
39444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39445 Paragraph ! Settings
39453 \begin_layout Standard
39454 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39455 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39459 \begin_layout Standard
39460 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39461 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39468 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39470 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39480 \begin_layout Subsection
39482 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39486 \begin_layout Standard
39488 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39489 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39494 \begin_layout Enumerate
39496 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39497 Customize text properties by means of the
39503 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39506 ; this is described in section
39507 \begin_inset space ~
39511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39513 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39520 \begin_layout Enumerate
39522 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39523 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39525 Apply last settings
39528 \begin_layout Enumerate
39530 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39531 Change the casing of selected text (
39546 \begin_layout Subsection
39548 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39552 \begin_layout Standard
39554 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39555 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39556 text styles (in the case of this document:
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39584 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39593 \begin_layout Subsection
39594 Table and Rows & Columns
39597 \begin_layout Standard
39598 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39599 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39600 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39603 \begin_layout Subsection
39607 \begin_layout Standard
39608 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39609 It will dissolve this inset.
39610 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39614 \begin_layout Subsection
39618 \begin_layout Standard
39619 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39620 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39623 \begin_layout Subsection
39624 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39627 \begin_layout Standard
39628 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39630 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39637 reference "sec:Nesting"
39642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39644 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39651 \begin_layout Section
39653 \begin_inset Index idx
39656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39665 \begin_layout Standard
39666 At the bottom of the
39670 menu the opened documents are listed.
39673 \begin_layout Subsection
39674 Open/Close all Insets
39677 \begin_layout Standard
39678 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39681 \begin_layout Subsection
39682 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39685 \begin_layout Standard
39686 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39689 \begin_layout Standard
39690 Math macros are described in the
39697 \begin_layout Subsection
39701 \begin_layout Standard
39702 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39709 reference "sec:Navigating"
39714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39716 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39723 \begin_layout Subsection
39727 \begin_layout Standard
39728 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39730 \begin_inset space ~
39734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39736 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39743 \begin_layout Subsection
39747 \begin_layout Standard
39748 Opens a window showing console messages.
39749 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39754 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39755 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39756 is processing the document.
39759 \begin_layout Subsection
39761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39763 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39768 \begin_inset Index idx
39771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39780 \begin_layout Standard
39781 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39783 All toolbars and the
39786 \begin_inset space ~
39791 can be turned on and off.
39796 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39808 \begin_inset space ~
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39825 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39829 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39836 \begin_layout Standard
39841 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39845 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39846 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39847 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39848 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39849 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39852 \begin_layout Standard
39854 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39861 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39868 \begin_layout Subsection
39872 \begin_layout Standard
39876 \begin_inset space ~
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39884 \begin_inset space ~
39888 \begin_inset space ~
39892 \begin_inset space ~
39896 \begin_inset space ~
39901 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39902 's main window vertically while
39905 \begin_inset space ~
39909 \begin_inset space ~
39913 \begin_inset space ~
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39930 will split it horizontally.
39931 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39932 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39933 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39934 three or more documents at the same time.
39935 To close a split view, use the menu
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39942 \begin_inset space ~
39950 \begin_layout Subsection
39954 \begin_layout Standard
39955 Closes a split view.
39958 \begin_layout Subsection
39962 \begin_layout Standard
39963 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39964 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39965 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39966 's main window fullscreen.
39967 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39968 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39971 \begin_layout Section
39973 \begin_inset Index idx
39976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39985 \begin_layout Subsection
39989 \begin_layout Standard
39990 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39991 \begin_inset space ~
39995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39997 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40008 \begin_layout Subsection
40010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40012 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40019 \begin_layout Standard
40020 Here you can insert the following characters:
40023 \begin_layout Description
40028 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40031 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40032 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40033 -packages you have installed.
40034 You can get a complete display by checking
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset Newline newline
40047 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40055 Not all characters will be visible in the
40059 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40060 dialog (see section
40061 \begin_inset space ~
40065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40067 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40071 ) can display every character.
40079 \begin_layout Description
40080 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40084 \begin_layout Description
40086 \begin_inset space ~
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40093 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40100 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40107 \begin_layout Description
40109 \begin_inset space ~
40112 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40116 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40122 \begin_layout Description
40124 \begin_inset space ~
40127 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40131 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40137 \begin_layout Description
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40142 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40146 \begin_layout Description
40148 \begin_inset space ~
40151 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40155 \begin_layout Description
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40160 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40166 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40172 \begin_layout Description
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40177 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40181 \begin_layout Description
40183 \begin_inset space ~
40187 \begin_inset Index idx
40190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40197 \begin_inset Index idx
40200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40201 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40206 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40207 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40209 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40215 \begin_inset Index idx
40218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40226 \begin_inset Newline newline
40229 More information about this feature can be found in the
40235 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40241 \begin_layout Description
40242 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40244 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40245 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40249 \begin_layout Subsection
40253 \begin_layout Standard
40254 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40257 \begin_layout Description
40258 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40259 \begin_inset script superscript
40261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40270 \begin_layout Description
40271 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40272 \begin_inset script subscript
40274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40283 \begin_layout Description
40285 \begin_inset space ~
40288 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40295 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40302 \begin_layout Description
40304 \begin_inset space ~
40307 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40308 \begin_inset space ~
40312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40314 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40321 \begin_layout Description
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40326 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40327 \begin_inset space ~
40331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40333 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40340 \begin_layout Description
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40345 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40351 \begin_inset space \space{}
40354 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40355 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40364 To insert a fraction use the command
40369 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40373 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40382 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40389 \begin_layout Description
40391 \begin_inset space ~
40394 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40395 \begin_inset space ~
40399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40401 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40408 \begin_layout Description
40410 \begin_inset space ~
40413 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40420 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40427 \begin_layout Description
40429 \begin_inset space ~
40432 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40433 \begin_inset space ~
40437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40439 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40446 \begin_layout Description
40447 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40454 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40461 \begin_layout Description
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40466 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40473 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40480 \begin_layout Description
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40485 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40486 \begin_inset space ~
40490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40492 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40499 \begin_layout Description
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40508 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40517 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40524 for a usage example.
40527 \begin_layout Description
40529 \begin_inset space ~
40533 \begin_inset space ~
40536 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40543 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40550 \begin_layout Description
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40555 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40556 as described in section
40557 \begin_inset space ~
40561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40563 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40570 \begin_layout Description
40572 \begin_inset space ~
40575 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40582 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40589 \begin_layout Description
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40594 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40595 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40603 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40610 \begin_layout Description
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40615 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40616 \begin_inset space ~
40620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40622 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40629 \begin_layout Description
40631 \begin_inset space ~
40635 \begin_inset space ~
40638 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40639 \begin_inset space ~
40643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40645 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40652 \begin_layout Subsection
40654 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40658 \begin_layout Standard
40660 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40661 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40662 The submenu allows you to insert
40665 \begin_layout Description
40667 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40669 \begin_inset space ~
40672 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40675 \begin_layout Description
40677 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40683 \begin_inset space ~
40686 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40690 \begin_layout Description
40692 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40697 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40700 \begin_layout Description
40702 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40707 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40710 \begin_layout Description
40712 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40714 \begin_inset space ~
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40721 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40725 \begin_layout Description
40727 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40729 \begin_inset space ~
40732 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40735 \begin_layout Description
40737 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40747 \begin_inset space ~
40750 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40753 \begin_layout Description
40755 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40760 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40762 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40763 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40769 \begin_layout Description
40771 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40776 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40778 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40779 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40785 \begin_layout Description
40787 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40788 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40789 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40790 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40793 \begin_layout Subsection
40797 \begin_layout Standard
40798 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40823 are described in section
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40830 reference "sec:toc"
40839 is described in section
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40846 reference "sec:Index"
40854 is described in section
40855 \begin_inset space ~
40859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40861 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40867 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40870 is described in section
40871 \begin_inset space ~
40875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40877 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40884 \begin_layout Subsection
40888 \begin_layout Standard
40889 To insert floats, as described in section
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40896 reference "sec:Floats"
40900 and in detail the chapter
40907 \begin_inset space ~
40915 \begin_layout Subsection
40919 \begin_layout Standard
40920 To insert notes, described in section
40921 \begin_inset space ~
40925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40927 reference "sec:Notes"
40934 \begin_layout Subsection
40938 \begin_layout Standard
40939 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40941 Branches are described in section
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40948 reference "sec:Branches"
40955 \begin_layout Subsection
40959 \begin_layout Standard
40960 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40961 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40963 An example is the document class
40964 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
40966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40974 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
40978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40983 with three custom insets.
40986 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40990 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40996 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40999 \begin_layout Subsection
41001 \begin_inset Index idx
41004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41013 \begin_layout Standard
41014 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41016 For more information see chapter
41018 External Document Parts
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_layout Subsection
41029 \begin_inset Index idx
41032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41041 \begin_layout Standard
41042 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41043 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41058 \begin_layout Subsection
41062 \begin_layout Standard
41067 dialog as described in section
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41074 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41081 \begin_layout Subsection
41085 \begin_layout Standard
41090 as described in section
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41097 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41104 \begin_layout Subsection
41108 \begin_layout Standard
41113 as described in section
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41120 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41127 \begin_layout Subsection
41129 \begin_inset Index idx
41132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41139 \begin_inset Index idx
41142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41143 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41151 \begin_layout Standard
41152 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41153 Floats are described in section
41154 \begin_inset space ~
41158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41160 reference "sec:Floats"
41164 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41166 Multi-page Captions
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \begin_layout Subsection
41183 \begin_layout Standard
41184 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41191 reference "sec:Index"
41198 \begin_layout Subsection
41202 \begin_layout Standard
41203 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41210 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41217 \begin_layout Subsection
41221 \begin_layout Standard
41222 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41223 Tables are described in section
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41230 reference "sec:Tables"
41234 and in detail in the chapter
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41249 \begin_layout Subsection
41253 \begin_layout Standard
41259 Graphics are described in section
41260 \begin_inset space ~
41264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41266 reference "sec:Graphics"
41273 \begin_layout Subsection
41277 \begin_layout Standard
41278 Inserts a URL as described in section
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41285 reference "subsec:URLs"
41292 \begin_layout Subsection
41296 \begin_layout Standard
41297 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41304 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41311 \begin_layout Subsection
41315 \begin_layout Standard
41316 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41323 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41330 \begin_layout Subsection
41334 \begin_layout Standard
41335 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41342 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41349 \begin_layout Subsection
41352 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41355 \begin_layout Standard
41356 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41357 environments of the same type.
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41365 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41369 for an explanation.
41372 \begin_layout Subsection
41376 \begin_layout Standard
41377 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41378 title or caption of a float.
41379 Inserts a short title as described in section
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41386 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41393 \begin_layout Subsection
41398 \begin_layout Standard
41399 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41400 Code box as described in section
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41407 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41414 \begin_layout Subsection
41416 \begin_inset Index idx
41419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41428 \begin_layout Standard
41429 Inserts a program listings box.
41430 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41432 Program Code Listings
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41445 \begin_layout Subsection
41447 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41451 \begin_layout Standard
41453 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41454 Inserts the actual date.
41455 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41462 \begin_layout Subsection
41466 \begin_layout Standard
41467 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41474 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41481 \begin_layout Section
41483 \begin_inset Index idx
41486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41495 \begin_layout Standard
41496 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41500 of the current document.
41501 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41504 \begin_layout Subsection
41508 \begin_layout Standard
41509 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41510 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41511 to jump, for example, between section
41512 \begin_inset space ~
41516 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41520 2.5 and use the submenu
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41527 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41540 \begin_inset space ~
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41550 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41554 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41560 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41563 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41566 \begin_layout Standard
41567 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41576 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41584 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41587 \begin_layout Subsection
41588 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41591 \begin_layout Standard
41592 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41596 \begin_layout Subsection
41600 \begin_layout Standard
41601 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41602 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41603 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41611 \begin_inset space ~
41619 \begin_layout Subsection
41623 \begin_layout Standard
41624 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41627 The \SpecialChar LyX
41628 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41630 \begin_inset space ~
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41643 manual for a detailed description.
41646 \begin_layout Section
41648 \begin_inset Index idx
41651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41660 \begin_layout Subsection
41664 \begin_layout Standard
41665 Change Tracking is described in section
41666 \begin_inset space ~
41670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41672 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41679 \begin_layout Subsection
41687 \begin_layout Standard
41688 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41689 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41690 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41692 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41693 to the clipboard or update the view.
41694 \begin_inset Newline newline
41697 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41701 \begin_layout Standard
41704 Open Containing Directory
41706 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41707 's temporary folder for the document.
41708 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41709 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41710 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41711 For example some journals require to send the
41715 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41719 \begin_layout Subsection
41720 Start Appendix Here
41723 \begin_layout Standard
41724 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41725 as described in section
41726 \begin_inset space ~
41730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41732 reference "sec:Appendices"
41739 \begin_layout Subsection
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41747 \begin_layout Standard
41748 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41749 default output format for the document (menu
41751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41752 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41753 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41759 \begin_inset space ~
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41771 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41775 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41778 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41779 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41784 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41789 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41801 \begin_inset space ~
41805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41807 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41811 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41812 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41814 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41815 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41820 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41825 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41829 \begin_inset space ~
41833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41835 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41840 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41841 when it is first configured.
41842 The default output format is
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41853 \begin_layout Subsection
41854 View (Other Formats)
41857 \begin_layout Standard
41858 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41859 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41860 actual document with an external program.
41861 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41862 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41863 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41865 All possible formats are listed in section
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41872 reference "subsec:Export"
41877 You should at least see the menu entry
41882 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41884 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41892 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41897 \begin_inset Index idx
41900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41901 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41910 \begin_layout Standard
41911 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41912 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41915 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41920 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41925 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41929 \begin_inset space ~
41933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41935 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41940 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41941 when it is first configured.
41944 \begin_layout Subsection
41946 \begin_inset space ~
41952 \begin_layout Standard
41953 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41954 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41957 \begin_layout Subsection
41958 Update (Other Formats)
41961 \begin_layout Standard
41962 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41963 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41966 \begin_layout Subsection
41967 View Master Document
41970 \begin_layout Standard
41971 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41987 \begin_inset space ~
41992 manual for more information on this topic).
41993 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41994 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41998 \begin_inset space ~
42002 \begin_inset space ~
42007 generates the output of the whole book, while
42011 will just output the chapter alone.
42014 \begin_layout Standard
42015 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42016 in the document settings (menu
42018 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42019 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42020 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42022 \begin_inset space ~
42026 \begin_inset space ~
42032 \begin_inset space ~
42036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42038 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42042 ) or in the preferences (menu
42044 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42045 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42047 \begin_inset space ~
42050 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42052 \begin_inset space ~
42055 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42057 \begin_inset space ~
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42067 \begin_inset space ~
42071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42073 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42080 \begin_layout Subsection
42081 Update Master Document
42084 \begin_layout Standard
42085 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42101 \begin_inset space ~
42106 manual for more information on this topic).
42107 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42108 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42111 \begin_layout Standard
42112 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42113 in the document settings (menu
42115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42116 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42117 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42119 \begin_inset space ~
42123 \begin_inset space ~
42129 \begin_inset space ~
42133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42135 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42139 ) or in the preferences (menu
42141 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42142 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42144 \begin_inset space ~
42147 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42152 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42154 \begin_inset space ~
42158 \begin_inset space ~
42164 \begin_inset space ~
42168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42170 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42177 \begin_layout Subsection
42179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42181 name "subsec:Compressed"
42188 \begin_layout Standard
42189 Un/compresses the current document.
42190 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42191 compression (see the
42193 Additional Features
42195 manual for details).
42198 \begin_layout Subsection
42202 \begin_layout Standard
42203 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42206 \begin_layout Subsection
42210 \begin_layout Standard
42211 The document settings are described in appendix
42212 \begin_inset space ~
42216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42218 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42225 \begin_layout Section
42227 \begin_inset Index idx
42230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42239 \begin_layout Subsection
42243 \begin_layout Standard
42244 Spell checking is explained in section
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42251 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42258 \begin_layout Subsection
42262 \begin_layout Standard
42263 The thesaurus is described in section
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42270 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42277 \begin_layout Subsection
42279 \begin_inset Index idx
42282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42289 \begin_inset Index idx
42292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42301 \begin_layout Standard
42302 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42303 the highlighted document part.
42306 \begin_layout Subsection
42312 \begin_inset Index idx
42315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42316 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42326 Generates with the help of the program
42328 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42331 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42332 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42333 This feature is not available on Windows.
42336 \begin_layout Subsection
42342 \begin_inset Index idx
42345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42355 \begin_layout Standard
42356 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42361 \begin_inset space ~
42366 to see the full filename paths.
42369 \begin_layout Subsection
42371 \begin_inset Index idx
42374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42383 \begin_layout Standard
42384 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42385 files as described in section
42386 \begin_inset space ~
42390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42392 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42399 \begin_layout Subsection
42401 \begin_inset Index idx
42404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42417 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42435 \begin_inset Index idx
42438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42448 \begin_layout Standard
42449 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42450 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42451 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42452 -packages and programs it needs; see
42454 \begin_inset space ~
42458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42460 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42467 \begin_layout Subsection
42471 \begin_layout Standard
42476 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42483 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42490 \begin_layout Section
42492 \begin_inset Index idx
42495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42504 \begin_layout Standard
42505 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42506 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42508 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42512 \begin_layout Standard
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42521 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42522 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42523 packages and classes found
42524 by \SpecialChar LyX
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42532 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42539 \begin_layout Standard
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42548 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42553 \begin_layout Section
42555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42557 name "sec:Toolbars"
42564 \begin_layout Standard
42565 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42566 \begin_inset space ~
42570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42572 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42579 \begin_layout Standard
42580 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42581 This is described in the
42583 Additional Features
42588 \begin_layout Subsection
42590 \begin_inset Index idx
42593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 \begin_layout Standard
42603 \begin_inset Graphics
42604 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42612 \begin_layout Standard
42613 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42619 \begin_layout Standard
42620 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42637 \begin_inset Note Note
42640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42641 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42646 manual for more information.
42654 \begin_layout Standard
42655 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42661 \begin_layout Standard
42662 \begin_inset Tabular
42663 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42664 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42666 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42672 \begin_inset Graphics
42673 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42687 pull-down box for the environments
42700 \begin_layout Standard
42701 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42707 \begin_layout Standard
42709 \begin_inset Tabular
42710 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42711 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42712 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42713 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42737 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42767 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42797 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42813 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42827 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42843 arg "spelling-continuously"
42851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42855 Spellcheck continuously
42861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42884 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42914 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42944 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42974 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43004 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43006 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43011 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43029 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43043 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43069 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43083 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43111 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43125 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43126 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43154 Emphasize text, function of the
43155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43158 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43160 \begin_inset space ~
43163 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43165 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43171 arg "dialog-show character"
43182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43203 Set text to noun style, function of the
43204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43207 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43209 \begin_inset space ~
43212 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43214 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43220 arg "dialog-show character"
43231 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43237 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43240 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43253 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43256 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43269 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43274 arg "textstyle-apply"
43284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43289 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43290 Format text using the current settings in the
43292 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43294 \begin_inset space ~
43297 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43332 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43334 \begin_inset space ~
43343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43352 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43380 arg "tabular-insert"
43388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43407 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43410 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43423 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43442 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43454 Toggle outline window on/off,
43456 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43472 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43499 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43511 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43524 \begin_layout Subsection
43526 \begin_inset Index idx
43529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43538 \begin_layout Standard
43539 \begin_inset Graphics
43540 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43548 \begin_layout Standard
43549 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43555 \begin_layout Standard
43556 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43560 \begin_layout Standard
43561 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43567 \begin_layout Standard
43568 \begin_inset Tabular
43569 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43570 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43571 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43609 arg "layout Enumerate"
43617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43636 arg "layout Itemize"
43644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43690 arg "layout Description"
43698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43717 arg "depth-increment"
43725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43731 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43737 \begin_inset space ~
43746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43755 arg "depth-decrement"
43763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43769 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43793 arg "float-insert figure"
43801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43808 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43824 arg "float-insert table"
43832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43839 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43846 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43869 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43885 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43915 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43961 \begin_inset space ~
43970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43979 arg "nomencl-insert"
43987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43995 \begin_inset space ~
44004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 arg "footnote-insert"
44021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44043 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44057 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44092 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44094 \begin_inset space ~
44103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44112 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44188 \begin_inset space ~
44197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44206 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44221 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44237 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44252 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44254 \begin_inset space ~
44263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 arg "dialog-show character"
44280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44286 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44291 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44304 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44309 arg "textstyle-apply"
44317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44322 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44323 Format text using the recent settings in the
44326 arg "dialog-show character"
44335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44344 arg "layout-paragraph"
44352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44358 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44378 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44406 \begin_layout Subsection
44407 View/Update Toolbar
44408 \begin_inset Index idx
44411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44412 Toolbar ! View / Update
44420 \begin_layout Standard
44421 \begin_inset Graphics
44422 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44429 \begin_layout Standard
44430 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44436 \begin_layout Standard
44437 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44441 \begin_layout Standard
44442 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44448 \begin_layout Standard
44449 \begin_inset Tabular
44450 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44451 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44452 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44453 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44493 arg "buffer-update"
44501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44507 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44523 arg "master-buffer-view"
44531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44539 \begin_inset space ~
44548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44557 arg "master-buffer-update"
44565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44573 \begin_inset space ~
44577 \begin_inset space ~
44586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44595 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44609 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44610 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44611 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44612 Synchronize with Output
44618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44629 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44645 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44646 View (Other Formats)
44652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44659 arg "update-others"
44663 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44678 Update (Other Formats)
44691 \begin_layout Standard
44693 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44694 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44700 \begin_layout Subsection
44704 \begin_layout Standard
44705 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44706 \begin_inset space ~
44710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44712 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44716 , the table toolbar
44717 \begin_inset Index idx
44720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44729 \begin_inset space ~
44734 manual and the math macro toolbar
44735 \begin_inset Index idx
44738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44751 \begin_layout Chapter
44752 The Document Settings
44753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44755 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44760 \begin_inset Index idx
44763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44764 Document ! Settings
44772 \begin_layout Standard
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44781 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44782 is called with the menu
44784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44788 You can save your document settings as default with the
44790 Save as Document Defaults
44792 button in any dialog.
44793 This will create a template named
44797 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44798 when you create a new document without
44802 \begin_layout Standard
44807 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44808 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44811 \begin_layout Standard
44812 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44813 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44814 to find the one you are looking for.
44815 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44816 the submenus of the dialog.
44818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44822 \begin_inset space \space{}
44826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44833 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44834 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44835 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44838 \begin_layout Section
44842 \begin_layout Standard
44843 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44845 Document classes are described in section
44846 \begin_inset space ~
44850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44852 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44860 \begin_layout Standard
44864 \begin_inset space ~
44869 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44874 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44875 as a layout for a document class.
44876 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44878 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44887 \begin_layout Standard
44888 Some classes use special class options by default.
44889 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44893 and you can decide to use them or not.
44894 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44895 recommended you leave them untouched.
44900 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44901 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44906 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44908 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44915 \begin_inset Newline newline
44920 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44923 \begin_inset Newline newline
44926 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44927 distribution, see section
44932 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44934 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44947 \begin_layout Standard
44952 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44953 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44954 in the background if the child document
44955 is opened without its master.
44956 This way child documents are always compilable.
44957 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44972 \begin_layout Standard
44973 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44984 \begin_inset Index idx
44987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44989 packages ! prettyref
44995 \begin_inset Index idx
44998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45000 packages ! refstyle
45005 for cross-references, see section
45006 \begin_inset space ~
45010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45012 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45019 \begin_layout Section
45023 \begin_layout Standard
45024 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45025 Please refer to the section
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45036 \begin_inset space ~
45041 manual for details.
45044 \begin_layout Section
45048 \begin_layout Standard
45049 Modules are explained in section
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45056 reference "subsec:Modules"
45063 \begin_layout Section
45067 \begin_layout Standard
45069 \begin_inset space ~
45073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45075 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45082 \begin_layout Section
45086 \begin_layout Standard
45087 The document font settings are described in section
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45094 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45101 \begin_layout Section
45105 \begin_layout Standard
45106 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45118 \begin_inset space ~
45123 and whether it should be a
45126 \begin_inset space ~
45131 can also be specified here.
45134 \begin_layout Standard
45135 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45136 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45137 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45139 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45142 \begin_layout Standard
45145 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45148 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45149 justifies the text on screen.
45150 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45152 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45156 \begin_layout Standard
45158 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45167 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45172 \begin_layout Section
45176 \begin_layout Standard
45177 This dialog is described in sections
45178 \begin_inset space ~
45182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45184 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45191 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45198 \begin_layout Section
45202 \begin_layout Standard
45203 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45204 \begin_inset space ~
45208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45210 reference "subsec:Margins"
45217 \begin_layout Section
45219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45221 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45226 \begin_inset Index idx
45229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45230 Language ! Encoding
45238 \begin_layout Standard
45239 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45240 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45241 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45243 is always encoded in utf8).
45244 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45245 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45246 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45247 -command is not known for
45248 a particular character).
45251 \begin_layout Standard
45252 If you use the option
45257 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45258 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
45259 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45261 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45262 exactly one encoding.
45263 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45266 \begin_layout Standard
45268 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45269 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45270 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45271 installation supports Unicode), choose
45272 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45273 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45274 is quite incomplete, so
45275 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45280 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45281 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45282 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45283 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45284 -commands is not used, because all
45285 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45286 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45287 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45288 , two new alternative engines
45289 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45291 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45293 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45296 \begin_inset space ~
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45312 \begin_inset space ~
45318 \begin_inset space ~
45322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45324 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45329 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45333 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45336 \begin_layout Standard
45340 \begin_inset space ~
45345 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45346 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45356 The possible settings are:
45359 \begin_layout Description
45360 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45362 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45363 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45367 \begin_inset space ~
45371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45373 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45380 \begin_layout Description
45381 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45382 format you will use.
45383 In many cases this will be
45388 \begin_inset Index idx
45391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45399 If the newer package
45404 \begin_inset Index idx
45407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45409 packages ! polyglossia
45414 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45415 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45416 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45418 this package will be used instead of
45425 \begin_layout Description
45427 \begin_inset space ~
45438 would be more appropriate.
45441 \begin_layout Description
45442 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45443 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45447 (for German texts), type in
45450 \begin_inset Newline newline
45455 usepackage{ngerman}
45458 \begin_layout Description
45459 None will not use a language package.
45460 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45463 \begin_layout Standard
45464 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45467 \begin_layout Description
45469 \begin_inset space ~
45473 \begin_inset space ~
45477 \begin_inset space ~
45484 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45490 \begin_inset Index idx
45493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45495 packages ! inputenc
45501 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45502 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45503 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45507 \begin_layout Description
45508 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45510 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45511 commands, which may result in a big
45512 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45513 -commands are needed.
45516 \begin_layout Description
45518 \begin_inset space ~
45522 \begin_inset space ~
45525 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45528 \begin_layout Description
45530 \begin_inset space ~
45534 \begin_inset space ~
45537 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45540 \begin_layout Description
45542 \begin_inset space ~
45545 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45548 \begin_layout Description
45550 \begin_inset space ~
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45557 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45558 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45561 \begin_layout Description
45563 \begin_inset space ~
45567 \begin_inset space ~
45570 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45574 \begin_layout Description
45576 \begin_inset space ~
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45583 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45584 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45587 \begin_layout Description
45589 \begin_inset space ~
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45597 \begin_inset space ~
45600 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45601 \begin_inset space ~
45607 \begin_layout Description
45609 \begin_inset space ~
45613 \begin_inset space ~
45617 \begin_inset space ~
45620 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45621 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45624 \begin_layout Description
45626 \begin_inset space ~
45630 \begin_inset space ~
45633 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45634 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45635 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45636 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45637 \begin_inset space ~
45641 \begin_inset space ~
45647 \begin_layout Description
45649 \begin_inset space ~
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45656 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45657 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45658 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45660 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45661 \begin_inset space ~
45665 \begin_inset space ~
45671 \begin_layout Description
45673 \begin_inset space ~
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45680 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45683 \begin_layout Description
45685 \begin_inset space ~
45689 \begin_inset space ~
45692 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45695 \begin_layout Description
45697 \begin_inset space ~
45701 \begin_inset space ~
45704 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45707 \begin_layout Description
45709 \begin_inset space ~
45712 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45715 \begin_layout Description
45717 \begin_inset space ~
45720 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45723 \begin_layout Description
45725 \begin_inset space ~
45729 \begin_inset space ~
45732 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45735 \begin_layout Description
45737 \begin_inset space ~
45741 \begin_inset space ~
45747 \begin_layout Description
45749 \begin_inset space ~
45753 \begin_inset space ~
45756 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45759 \begin_layout Description
45761 \begin_inset space ~
45765 \begin_inset space ~
45771 \begin_layout Description
45773 \begin_inset space ~
45777 \begin_inset space ~
45780 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45786 \begin_inset Index idx
45789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45796 , when using this, set the document language to
45801 \begin_layout Description
45803 \begin_inset space ~
45807 \begin_inset space ~
45810 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45815 , when using this, set the document language to
45818 \begin_inset space ~
45824 \begin_layout Description
45826 \begin_inset space ~
45830 \begin_inset space ~
45833 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45839 \begin_inset Index idx
45842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 packages ! japanese
45849 , when using this, set the document language to
45854 \begin_layout Description
45856 \begin_inset space ~
45860 \begin_inset space ~
45863 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45868 , when using this, set the document language to
45873 \begin_layout Description
45875 \begin_inset space ~
45879 \begin_inset space ~
45882 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45887 , when using this, set the document language to
45892 \begin_layout Description
45894 \begin_inset space ~
45897 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45900 \begin_layout Description
45902 \begin_inset space ~
45906 \begin_inset space ~
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45913 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45916 \begin_layout Description
45918 \begin_inset space ~
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45926 \begin_inset space ~
45929 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45930 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45931 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45934 \begin_layout Description
45936 \begin_inset space ~
45940 \begin_inset space ~
45946 \begin_layout Description
45948 \begin_inset space ~
45952 \begin_inset space ~
45955 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45956 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45959 \begin_layout Description
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45968 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45974 \begin_inset Index idx
45977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45984 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45987 \begin_layout Description
45989 \begin_inset space ~
45997 \begin_inset space ~
46000 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46007 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46010 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46017 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46018 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46020 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46023 \begin_layout Description
46025 \begin_inset space ~
46029 \begin_inset space ~
46032 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46038 \begin_inset Index idx
46041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46048 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46051 \begin_layout Description
46053 \begin_inset space ~
46056 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46062 \begin_inset Index idx
46065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46067 packages ! inputenc
46073 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46077 \begin_layout Description
46079 \begin_inset space ~
46083 \begin_inset space ~
46087 \begin_inset space ~
46090 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46091 \begin_inset space ~
46097 \begin_layout Description
46099 \begin_inset space ~
46103 \begin_inset space ~
46107 \begin_inset space ~
46110 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46111 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46112 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46116 \begin_layout Description
46118 \begin_inset space ~
46122 \begin_inset space ~
46126 \begin_inset space ~
46129 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46130 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46133 \begin_layout Section
46135 \begin_inset Index idx
46138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46145 \begin_inset Index idx
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46155 \begin_inset Index idx
46158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46159 Color ! Shaded boxes
46165 \begin_inset Index idx
46168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46169 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46177 \begin_layout Standard
46178 Here you can alter the font color for the
46182 (default: black), for
46185 \begin_inset space ~
46190 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46194 (default: white) and for
46197 \begin_inset space ~
46207 sets the color back to the default.
46210 \begin_layout Standard
46211 Clicking any button showing
46219 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46220 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46221 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46222 later more quickly.
46225 \begin_layout Standard
46226 Note, if you change the
46229 \begin_inset space ~
46234 font color and use the option
46237 \begin_inset space ~
46242 in the document settings under
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46250 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46251 \begin_inset space ~
46255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46257 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46264 \begin_layout Standard
46265 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46271 \begin_layout Standard
46275 \begin_inset space ~
46284 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46287 \begin_inset space ~
46290 Code after a forced page break:
46293 \begin_layout Itemize
46294 For the page color:
46295 \begin_inset Newline newline
46302 pagecolor{color name}
46305 \begin_layout Itemize
46306 For the text color:
46307 \begin_inset Newline newline
46317 \begin_layout Standard
46318 You are restricted to one of
46354 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46361 \begin_inset space ~
46367 \begin_inset Newline newline
46370 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46371 names to refer to them:
46374 \begin_layout Itemize
46380 \begin_inset Newline newline
46385 page_backgroundcolor
46388 \begin_layout Itemize
46392 \begin_inset space ~
46398 \begin_inset Newline newline
46406 \begin_layout Itemize
46410 \begin_inset space ~
46416 \begin_inset Newline newline
46424 \begin_layout Itemize
46428 \begin_inset space ~
46434 \begin_inset Newline newline
46442 \begin_layout Standard
46443 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46446 \begin_inset space ~
46454 \begin_inset space ~
46462 \begin_layout Section
46466 \begin_layout Standard
46467 Here you can adjust the
46471 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46475 as described in section
46476 \begin_inset space ~
46480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46482 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46489 \begin_layout Section
46493 \begin_layout Standard
46494 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46500 \begin_inset Index idx
46503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46505 packages ! biblatex
46515 \begin_inset Index idx
46518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46530 \begin_inset Index idx
46533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46541 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46544 Sectioned bibliography
46546 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46552 \begin_inset Index idx
46555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46557 packages ! bibtopic
46567 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46568 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46572 for the generation of the bibliography.
46573 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46574 \begin_inset space ~
46578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46580 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46587 \begin_layout Section
46591 \begin_layout Standard
46592 Here you can define the
46596 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46598 \begin_inset space ~
46602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46604 reference "sec:Index"
46611 \begin_layout Section
46615 \begin_layout Standard
46616 The PDF properties are explained in section
46617 \begin_inset space ~
46621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46623 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46630 \begin_layout Section
46634 \begin_layout Standard
46635 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
46636 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46642 \begin_inset Index idx
46645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46657 \begin_inset Index idx
46660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46672 \begin_inset Index idx
46675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46687 \begin_inset Index idx
46690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46702 \begin_inset Index idx
46705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46707 packages ! mathdots
46717 \begin_inset Index idx
46720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46722 packages ! mathtools
46732 \begin_inset Index idx
46735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46747 \begin_inset Index idx
46750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46752 packages ! stackrel
46762 \begin_inset Index idx
46765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46767 packages ! stmaryrd
46777 \begin_inset Index idx
46780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46782 packages ! undertilde
46787 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46790 \begin_layout Description
46791 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46792 -errors in formulas,
46793 ensure that you have this enabled.
46796 \begin_layout Description
46797 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46798 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46799 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46803 \begin_layout Description
46804 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46807 \begin_inset space ~
46819 \begin_layout Description
46820 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46823 \begin_inset space ~
46835 \begin_layout Description
46836 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46847 \begin_layout Description
46848 mathtools is used for the math commands
46884 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46891 \begin_layout Description
46892 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46894 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46903 \begin_layout Description
46904 stackrel is used for the math command
46921 \begin_layout Description
46922 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46925 \begin_layout Description
46926 undertilde is used for the math command
46934 Accents for one Character
46943 \begin_layout Section
46945 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
46947 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
46953 \begin_layout Standard
46955 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
46956 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
46959 \begin_layout Standard
46961 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
46962 The float placement options
46963 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
46966 are described in the section
46969 \begin_inset space ~
46973 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
46975 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46991 \begin_layout Section
46995 \begin_layout Standard
46996 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46998 Program Code Listings
47003 \begin_inset space ~
47011 \begin_layout Section
47015 \begin_layout Standard
47016 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47024 set to be used and set the
47029 The itemize environment is described in section
47030 \begin_inset space ~
47034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47036 reference "sec:Itemize"
47043 \begin_layout Standard
47044 You can furthermore specify a
47047 \begin_inset space ~
47052 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47053 command of the desired character.
47054 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47061 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47067 \begin_inset space \space{}
47071 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47081 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47082 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47085 \begin_layout Standard
47086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47094 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47095 -packages in the preamble (menu
47098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47099 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47108 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47112 usepackage{textcomp}
47115 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47119 usepackage{amssymb}
47129 \begin_layout Section
47133 \begin_layout Standard
47134 Branches are described in section
47135 \begin_inset space ~
47139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47141 reference "sec:Branches"
47148 \begin_layout Section
47150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47152 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47159 \begin_layout Standard
47160 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47163 \begin_layout Description
47165 \begin_inset space ~
47169 \begin_inset space ~
47172 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47192 View Master Document
47193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47200 Update Master Document
47201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47208 menu or the toolbar.
47209 The default is set in
47211 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47212 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47214 \begin_inset space ~
47217 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47221 \begin_inset space ~
47225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47227 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47234 \begin_layout Description
47236 \begin_inset space ~
47240 \begin_inset space ~
47243 Output settings for the menu
47245 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47247 \begin_inset space ~
47253 For a detailed description see section
47255 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47260 \begin_inset space ~
47268 \begin_layout Description
47270 \begin_inset space ~
47274 \begin_inset space ~
47277 Options offers settings for the export format
47285 \begin_inset space ~
47290 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47291 \begin_inset space ~
47294 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47298 \begin_inset space ~
47303 settings are described in detail in section
47305 Math Output in XHTML
47310 \begin_inset space ~
47319 \begin_inset space ~
47323 \begin_inset space ~
47328 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47331 \begin_layout Description
47333 \begin_inset space ~
47338 Save transient properties
47340 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47341 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47342 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47346 \begin_layout Itemize
47347 the activation of change tracking
47350 \begin_layout Itemize
47351 the output of tracked changes
47354 \begin_layout Itemize
47355 the recording of the document directory path.
47358 \begin_layout Standard
47359 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47360 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47364 \begin_layout Section
47372 \begin_layout Standard
47373 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47375 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47377 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47379 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47383 \begin_layout Standard
47384 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47385 -syntax is given in section
47386 \begin_inset space ~
47390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47392 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47399 \begin_layout Chapter
47405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47407 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47412 \begin_inset Index idx
47415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47424 \begin_layout Standard
47425 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47427 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47431 It has the following submenus.
47434 \begin_layout Section
47438 \begin_layout Subsection
47442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47443 User Interface File
47444 \begin_inset Index idx
47447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47448 Customization ! of toolbars
47454 \begin_inset Index idx
47457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47458 Customization ! of menus
47466 \begin_layout Standard
47467 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47468 interface (ui) file.
47469 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47477 \begin_layout Description
47482 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47485 \begin_layout Description
47492 the menu entries in popup context menus
47495 \begin_layout Description
47500 specifies the toolbar buttons
47503 \begin_layout Standard
47504 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47505 and edit the entries.
47508 \begin_layout Standard
47509 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47521 entries must be finished with an explicit
47546 and in the case of the
47547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47559 The syntax for the entries is:
47562 \begin_layout Standard
47563 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47592 \begin_layout Standard
47594 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47597 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47598 -functions are listed in the menu
47600 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47602 \begin_inset space ~
47610 \begin_layout Standard
47611 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47617 \begin_layout Standard
47618 For example, assuming you use the menu
47620 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47623 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
47627 \begin_layout Standard
47628 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47652 \begin_layout Standard
47654 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47669 to have the sixth bookmark.
47672 \begin_layout Standard
47676 \begin_inset space ~
47681 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
47682 's toolbar buttons.
47683 The currently available icon sets are compared in
47684 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47687 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
47695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47699 \begin_layout Standard
47702 Enable tool tips in main work area
47704 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47712 \begin_layout Standard
47717 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47718 should display in the menu
47720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47722 \begin_inset space ~
47730 \begin_layout Subsection
47734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47738 \begin_layout Standard
47741 Restore window layouts and geometries
47744 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47745 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47749 \begin_layout Standard
47752 Restore cursor positions
47754 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47758 \begin_layout Standard
47761 Load opened files from last session
47763 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47767 \begin_layout Standard
47770 Clear all session information
47772 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47773 sessions (cursor positions, names
47774 of last opened documents, etc.).
47777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47781 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47786 \begin_inset Index idx
47789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47798 \begin_layout Standard
47801 Backup original documents when saving
47803 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47804 it was saved the last time.
47805 It is stored in the
47808 \begin_inset space ~
47814 \begin_inset space ~
47818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47820 reference "sec:Paths"
47824 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47827 \begin_inset space ~
47833 The backup file has the file extension
47834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47848 \begin_layout Standard
47851 Backup documents, every
47853 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47856 \begin_layout Standard
47859 Save documents compressed by default
47861 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47862 \begin_inset space ~
47866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47868 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47873 This applies to newly created documents only.
47874 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47878 Windows & work area
47881 \begin_layout Standard
47884 Open documents in tabs
47886 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47890 \begin_layout Standard
47895 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47908 reference "sec:Paths"
47912 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47919 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47920 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47921 of \SpecialChar LyX
47923 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47924 instance is created for each file.
47927 \begin_layout Standard
47930 Single close-tab button
47932 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47942 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47943 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47944 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47948 \begin_layout Standard
47949 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47957 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47958 before the change takes effect.
47966 \begin_layout Standard
47971 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47973 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47975 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47979 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47980 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47981 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47984 \begin_layout Subsection
47986 \begin_inset Index idx
47989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47998 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48005 \begin_layout Standard
48006 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48010 \begin_layout Standard
48011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48019 This section only deals with the fonts
48023 the \SpecialChar LyX
48025 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48029 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48040 \begin_layout Standard
48041 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48058 (depends on the system) as its
48061 \begin_inset space ~
48077 \begin_layout Standard
48078 You can change the font size with the
48085 \begin_layout Standard
48090 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48095 points have the size of 1
48096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48100 \begin_inset space ~
48104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48106 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48111 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48116 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48117 \begin_inset space ~
48121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48123 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48130 \begin_layout Subsection
48132 \begin_inset Index idx
48135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48136 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48143 \begin_inset Index idx
48146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48155 \begin_layout Standard
48156 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48157 by choosing an item in the
48158 list and selecting the
48165 \begin_layout Standard
48166 By checking the option
48170 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48173 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48174 \begin_inset space ~
48178 \begin_inset space ~
48183 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48186 \begin_layout Subsection
48188 \begin_inset Index idx
48191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48200 \begin_layout Standard
48201 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48205 \begin_layout Standard
48210 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48211 This feature is described in section
48212 \begin_inset space ~
48216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48218 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48225 \begin_layout Standard
48226 Checking the option
48229 \begin_inset space ~
48233 \begin_inset space ~
48237 \begin_inset space ~
48242 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48245 \begin_layout Section
48247 \begin_inset Index idx
48250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48259 \begin_layout Subsection
48263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48267 \begin_layout Standard
48270 Cursor follows scrollbar
48272 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48276 \begin_layout Standard
48277 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48278 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48279 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48282 \begin_layout Standard
48285 Scroll below end of document
48287 is self-explanatory.
48290 \begin_layout Standard
48291 In \SpecialChar LyX
48292 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48299 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48301 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48302 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48305 \begin_layout Standard
48308 Sort environments alphabetically
48310 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48313 \begin_layout Standard
48316 Group environments by their category
48318 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48321 \begin_layout Standard
48326 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48341 \begin_layout Standard
48342 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48347 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48348 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48352 \begin_layout Subsection
48354 \begin_inset Index idx
48357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48364 \begin_inset Index idx
48367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48368 Settings ! Shortcuts
48376 \begin_layout Standard
48381 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48383 Several binding files are available, among them:
48386 \begin_layout Description
48387 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48390 \begin_layout Description
48391 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48403 \begin_layout Description
48404 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48415 \begin_layout Standard
48416 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48421 , and binding files for special languages.
48422 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48427 \begin_inset space \space{}
48431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48439 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48440 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48441 will try to use the appropriate binding
48445 \begin_layout Standard
48446 Some binding files, like
48450 , only have a limited scope.
48451 When looking at the end of the file
48455 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48458 \begin_layout Standard
48462 \begin_inset space ~
48466 \begin_inset space ~
48471 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48472 in the selected key binding file.
48475 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48479 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48484 \begin_inset Index idx
48487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48488 Key Bindings ! Editing
48496 \begin_layout Standard
48497 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48498 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48499 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48500 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48503 Show key-bindings containing
48506 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48507 Insert there for example as keyword
48508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48515 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48516 functions that contain
48517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48525 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48526 All \SpecialChar LyX
48527 functions are also listed in the file
48532 that you will find in the
48539 \begin_layout Standard
48540 For example, to add the shortcut
48548 , select the function and press the
48553 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48554 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48557 \begin_layout Standard
48558 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48559 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48561 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48562 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48564 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48569 \begin_layout Standard
48570 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48573 \begin_layout Standard
48574 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48576 The syntax of the entries is:
48579 \begin_layout Standard
48585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48604 \begin_layout Standard
48605 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48606 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48634 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
48635 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
48636 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
48637 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
48639 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
48643 , you needed to specify it as
48648 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
48651 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
48654 \begin_layout Subsection
48656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48658 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
48663 \begin_inset Index idx
48666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48673 \begin_inset Index idx
48676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48677 Settings ! Keyboard Map
48685 \begin_layout Standard
48686 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
48687 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
48688 provides keyboard maps.
48689 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
48690 is a Romanian one, you can enable
48693 \begin_inset space ~
48697 \begin_inset space ~
48702 and select the keyboard map file named
48709 \begin_layout Standard
48718 keyboard map and, if you use the
48722 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48725 arg "keymap-primary"
48731 arg "keymap-secondary"
48734 respectively or toggle between them with
48737 arg "keymap-toggle"
48743 \begin_layout Standard
48744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48752 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48761 \begin_layout Standard
48762 You can also specify the mouse
48764 Wheel scrolling speed
48767 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48771 Middle mouse button pasting
48773 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48774 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48777 \begin_layout Standard
48785 \begin_inset space ~
48789 \begin_inset space ~
48794 you can select a key for zooming.
48795 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48798 \begin_layout Subsection
48802 \begin_layout Standard
48803 Input completion is described in section
48804 \begin_inset space ~
48808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48810 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48817 \begin_layout Section
48819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48826 \begin_inset Index idx
48829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48836 \begin_inset Index idx
48839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48848 \begin_layout Standard
48849 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48850 are normally determined during
48852 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48855 \begin_layout Description
48857 \begin_inset space ~
48860 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48861 's working directory.
48862 It is the default when you
48873 \begin_inset space ~
48881 \begin_layout Description
48883 \begin_inset space ~
48886 templates This directory
48887 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
48888 contains the templates that are shown
48889 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
48890 will be opened when you use the menu
48891 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
48896 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48898 \begin_inset space ~
48902 \begin_inset space ~
48910 \begin_layout Description
48912 \begin_inset space ~
48915 files This directory
48916 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
48917 will be opened when you use the
48918 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
48919 contains the example files that are listed in
48922 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
48931 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48933 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
48935 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
48941 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
48943 \begin_inset Newline newline
48947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48959 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48960 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48970 \begin_layout Description
48972 \begin_inset space ~
48976 \begin_inset Index idx
48979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48985 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48986 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48987 \begin_inset space ~
48991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48993 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49001 will be used to save the backups.
49002 \begin_inset Newline newline
49005 Backup files have the ending
49006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49016 \begin_layout Description
49018 \begin_inset space ~
49021 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49022 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49024 \begin_inset Newline newline
49031 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49037 You can edit this file with the program
49046 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49047 in its preferences under
49050 \begin_inset space ~
49056 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49061 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49063 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49064 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49070 and \SpecialChar LyX
49071 need to be running the same time.
49072 \begin_inset Newline newline
49075 The pipe is also used for the
49079 feature, see section
49080 \begin_inset space ~
49084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49086 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49091 \begin_inset Newline newline
49094 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49095 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49096 \begin_inset Newline newline
49112 \begin_layout Description
49114 \begin_inset space ~
49117 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49120 \begin_layout Description
49122 \begin_inset space ~
49125 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49126 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49127 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49130 \begin_layout Description
49132 \begin_inset space ~
49135 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49141 You only need to specify it if you are using
49145 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49147 For \SpecialChar LyX
49152 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49156 \begin_layout Description
49158 \begin_inset space ~
49161 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49162 When \SpecialChar LyX
49163 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49164 to find it on the system.
49165 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49167 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49176 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49177 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49180 \begin_layout Description
49182 \begin_inset space ~
49185 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49186 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49187 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49188 code or in the document
49190 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49192 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49193 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49194 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49195 scanned for the input files.
49196 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49197 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49199 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49200 compilation may fail for some documents.
49203 \begin_layout Section
49207 \begin_layout Standard
49208 Here you can insert your
49217 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49219 \begin_inset space ~
49223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49225 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49229 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49232 \begin_layout Section
49234 \begin_inset Index idx
49237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49238 Language ! Settings
49244 \begin_inset Index idx
49247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49248 Settings ! Language
49256 \begin_layout Subsection
49258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49260 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49267 \begin_layout Description
49269 \begin_inset space ~
49273 \begin_inset space ~
49276 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49278 You can find its actual translation status here:
49279 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49281 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49289 \begin_layout Description
49291 \begin_inset space ~
49294 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49295 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49296 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49297 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49314 The most widespread language package is
49319 \begin_inset Index idx
49322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49329 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49331 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49332 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49333 come with the alternative
49339 \begin_inset Index idx
49342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49344 packages ! polyglossia
49349 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49350 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49356 The available selections are described in section
49357 \begin_inset space ~
49361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49363 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49370 \begin_layout Description
49372 \begin_inset space ~
49375 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49376 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49377 you can here specify the command to start the package.
49378 An example is the start command
49384 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49386 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49406 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49411 \begin_layout Description
49413 \begin_inset space ~
49421 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49422 command toggles the package on and off.
49425 \begin_layout Description
49427 \begin_inset space ~
49431 \begin_inset space ~
49434 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49438 \begin_layout Description
49440 \begin_inset space ~
49444 \begin_inset space ~
49447 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49451 \begin_layout Description
49453 \begin_inset space ~
49457 \begin_inset space ~
49460 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49461 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49462 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49464 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49471 \begin_layout Description
49473 \begin_inset space ~
49476 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49478 When this option is not set, the
49481 \begin_inset space ~
49486 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49488 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49491 \begin_inset space ~
49499 \begin_layout Description
49501 \begin_inset space ~
49507 \begin_inset space ~
49513 When it is not set, the
49516 \begin_inset space ~
49521 is set to the end of the document.
49524 \begin_layout Description
49526 \begin_inset space ~
49530 \begin_inset space ~
49533 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49534 language will be underlined in blue.
49537 \begin_layout Description
49539 \begin_inset space ~
49543 \begin_inset space ~
49546 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49547 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49550 \begin_layout Description
49552 \begin_inset space ~
49555 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49556 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49557 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49558 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49561 \begin_layout Subsection
49565 \begin_layout Standard
49566 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49567 \begin_inset space ~
49571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49573 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49580 \begin_layout Section
49584 \begin_layout Subsection
49586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49588 name "subsec:General-output"
49595 \begin_layout Description
49597 \begin_inset space ~
49600 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49602 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49604 \begin_inset space ~
49610 For a detailed description see section
49612 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49617 \begin_inset space ~
49625 \begin_layout Description
49627 \begin_inset space ~
49630 Options Options for the program
49634 that is used for the export format
49639 \begin_inset space ~
49643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49645 reference "subsec:Export"
49650 Possible options are listed in the
49655 \begin_inset Newline newline
49659 \begin_inset Flex URL
49662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49664 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
49674 \begin_layout Description
49676 \begin_inset space ~
49680 \begin_inset space ~
49683 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
49686 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49687 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
49689 \begin_inset space ~
49695 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
49698 \begin_layout Description
49700 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
49702 \begin_inset space ~
49706 \begin_inset Index idx
49709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49716 \begin_inset Index idx
49719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49720 Settings ! Date format
49725 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
49726 \begin_inset Newline newline
49730 \begin_inset Flex URL
49733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49735 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49741 \begin_inset Newline newline
49744 For example the format
49745 \begin_inset Newline newline
49749 \begin_inset Newline newline
49752 prints the date as day/month/year.
49757 \begin_layout Description
49759 \begin_inset space ~
49763 \begin_inset space ~
49766 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49767 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49770 \begin_layout Subsection
49776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49778 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49783 \begin_inset Index idx
49786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49787 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49796 \begin_layout Description
49798 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49800 \begin_inset space ~
49808 \begin_inset space ~
49812 \begin_inset space ~
49815 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49820 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49841 are used for Cyrillic.
49842 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49855 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49857 sets up in the background.
49858 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49863 \begin_layout Description
49865 \begin_inset space ~
49869 \begin_inset space ~
49873 \begin_inset space ~
49877 \begin_inset space ~
49880 options They only have an effect when the program
49884 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49887 \begin_layout Standard
49888 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49889 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49890 manuals of the applications.
49893 \begin_layout Description
49895 \begin_inset space ~
49898 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49899 \begin_inset space ~
49903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49905 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49912 \begin_layout Description
49914 \begin_inset space ~
49917 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49918 \begin_inset space ~
49922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49924 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49931 \begin_layout Description
49933 \begin_inset space ~
49936 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49937 \begin_inset space ~
49941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49943 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49950 \begin_layout Description
49956 \begin_inset space ~
49959 command Command for the program
49961 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49964 that is described in the section
49966 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49971 Additional Features
49976 \begin_layout Standard
49977 There are additionally the following options:
49980 \begin_layout Description
49982 \begin_inset space ~
49986 \begin_inset space ~
49990 \begin_inset space ~
49994 \begin_inset space ~
49999 \begin_inset space ~
50002 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50020 to separate folders.
50021 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50023 \begin_inset Index idx
50026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50033 \begin_inset Index idx
50036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50045 \begin_layout Description
50047 \begin_inset space ~
50051 \begin_inset space ~
50055 \begin_inset space ~
50059 \begin_inset space ~
50063 \begin_inset space ~
50067 \begin_inset space ~
50070 changes Removes all manually set
50076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50077 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50079 \begin_inset space ~
50084 dialog when changing the document class.
50087 \begin_layout Section
50089 \begin_inset space ~
50093 \begin_inset Index idx
50096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50105 \begin_layout Subsection
50107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50109 name "subsec:Converters"
50114 \begin_inset Index idx
50117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50126 \begin_layout Standard
50127 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
50128 from one format to another.
50129 You can modify converters or create new ones.
50130 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
50137 \begin_inset space ~
50142 field and press the
50147 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
50151 \begin_inset space ~
50156 drop-down list, modify the
50160 field and press the
50167 \begin_layout Standard
50170 Converter File Cache
50176 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
50178 Maximum Age (in days
50181 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
50182 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
50185 \begin_layout Standard
50186 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
50187 definition, is described in the section
50198 \begin_layout Subsection
50200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50202 name "sec:File-Formats"
50207 \begin_inset Index idx
50210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50217 \begin_inset Index idx
50220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50229 \begin_layout Standard
50230 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
50240 programs that should be used for certain formats.
50243 \begin_layout Standard
50244 You can also define the
50246 Default output format
50248 that is used when you use
50250 View, Update, View Master Document
50254 Update Master Document
50260 menu or the toolbar.
50263 \begin_layout Standard
50264 More about formats and their options is described in the section
50275 \begin_layout Standard
50276 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
50278 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
50279 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
50280 This is done by specifying a
50285 More about this is described in the section
50296 \begin_layout Chapter
50297 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50299 \begin_inset Index idx
50302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50311 name "chap:Units-available-in"
50318 \begin_layout Standard
50320 \begin_inset space ~
50324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50326 reference "tab:Units"
50330 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50331 and used in this documentation.
50334 \begin_layout Standard
50335 \begin_inset Float table
50342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
50345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50361 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50369 \begin_inset Tabular
50370 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
50371 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
50372 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50373 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
50374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50527 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50798 scaled point (65536
50799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50866 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50990 % of original image width
50995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51079 \begin_layout Standard
51080 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51083 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
51090 \begin_layout Bibliography
51091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51092 LatexCommand bibitem
51099 The \SpecialChar LyX
51101 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51104 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
51110 \begin_inset Newline newline
51114 \begin_inset Flex URL
51117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51119 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
51127 \begin_layout Bibliography
51128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51129 LatexCommand bibitem
51130 key "latexcompanion"
51135 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
51137 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51138 Companion Second Edition.
51141 Addison-Wesley, 2004
51144 \begin_layout Bibliography
51145 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51146 LatexCommand bibitem
51152 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
51155 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
51159 Addison-Wesley, 2003
51162 \begin_layout Bibliography
51163 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51164 LatexCommand bibitem
51173 : A Document Preparation System.
51176 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
51179 \begin_layout Bibliography
51180 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51181 LatexCommand bibitem
51191 The \SpecialChar TeX
51195 Addison-Wesley, 1984
51198 \begin_layout Bibliography
51199 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51200 LatexCommand bibitem
51206 The \SpecialChar TeX
51208 \begin_inset Newline newline
51212 \begin_inset Flex URL
51215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51217 https://ctan.org/topic
51225 \begin_layout Bibliography
51226 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51227 LatexCommand bibitem
51233 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51235 \begin_inset Newline newline
51239 \begin_inset Flex URL
51242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51244 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
51252 \begin_layout Bibliography
51253 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51254 LatexCommand bibitem
51261 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51263 name "Documentation"
51264 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
51271 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51275 \begin_inset Newline newline
51279 \begin_inset Flex URL
51282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51284 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
51292 \begin_layout Bibliography
51293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51294 LatexCommand bibitem
51301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51303 name "Documentation"
51304 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
51309 how to use the program
51311 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51315 \begin_inset Newline newline
51319 \begin_inset Flex URL
51322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51324 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
51332 \begin_layout Bibliography
51333 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51334 LatexCommand bibitem
51341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51343 name "Documentation"
51344 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
51349 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51355 \begin_inset Index idx
51358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51360 packages ! biblatex
51366 \begin_inset Newline newline
51370 \begin_inset Flex URL
51373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51375 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
51383 \begin_layout Bibliography
51384 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51385 LatexCommand bibitem
51392 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51394 name "Documentation"
51395 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
51400 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51406 \begin_inset Index idx
51409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51417 \begin_inset Newline newline
51421 \begin_inset Flex URL
51424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51426 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51434 \begin_layout Bibliography
51435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51436 LatexCommand bibitem
51443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51445 name "Documentation"
51446 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51456 \begin_inset Newline newline
51460 \begin_inset Flex URL
51463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51465 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51473 \begin_layout Bibliography
51474 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51475 LatexCommand bibitem
51476 key "makeindex-man"
51482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51485 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51495 \begin_inset Newline newline
51499 \begin_inset Flex URL
51502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51504 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51512 \begin_layout Bibliography
51513 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51514 LatexCommand bibitem
51521 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51523 name "Documentation"
51524 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51534 \begin_inset Newline newline
51538 \begin_inset Flex URL
51541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51543 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51551 \begin_layout Bibliography
51552 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51553 LatexCommand bibitem
51560 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51562 name "Documentation"
51563 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51568 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51570 \begin_inset Newline newline
51574 \begin_inset Flex URL
51577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51579 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51587 \begin_layout Bibliography
51588 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51589 LatexCommand bibitem
51596 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51598 name "Documentation"
51599 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51604 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51610 \begin_inset Index idx
51613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51621 \begin_inset Newline newline
51625 \begin_inset Flex URL
51628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51630 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
51638 \begin_layout Bibliography
51639 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51640 LatexCommand bibitem
51647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51649 name "Documentation"
51650 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
51655 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51661 \begin_inset Index idx
51664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51666 packages ! enumitem
51672 \begin_inset Newline newline
51676 \begin_inset Flex URL
51679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51681 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
51689 \begin_layout Bibliography
51690 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51691 LatexCommand bibitem
51698 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51700 name "Documentation"
51701 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
51706 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51712 \begin_inset Index idx
51715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51717 packages ! fancyhdr
51723 \begin_inset Newline newline
51727 \begin_inset Flex URL
51730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51732 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51740 \begin_layout Bibliography
51741 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51742 LatexCommand bibitem
51749 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51751 name "Documentation"
51752 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51757 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51763 \begin_inset Index idx
51766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51768 packages ! hyperref
51774 \begin_inset Newline newline
51778 \begin_inset Flex URL
51781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51783 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51791 \begin_layout Bibliography
51792 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51793 LatexCommand bibitem
51800 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51802 name "Documentation"
51803 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51808 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51814 \begin_inset Index idx
51817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51819 packages ! microtpye
51825 \begin_inset Newline newline
51829 \begin_inset Flex URL
51832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51834 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51842 \begin_layout Bibliography
51843 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51844 LatexCommand bibitem
51851 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51853 name "Documentation"
51854 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51859 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51865 \begin_inset Index idx
51868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51876 \begin_inset Newline newline
51880 \begin_inset Flex URL
51883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51885 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51893 \begin_layout Bibliography
51894 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51895 LatexCommand bibitem
51902 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51904 name "Documentation"
51905 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51910 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51916 \begin_inset Index idx
51919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51921 packages ! prettyref
51927 \begin_inset Newline newline
51931 \begin_inset Flex URL
51934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51936 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51944 \begin_layout Bibliography
51945 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51946 LatexCommand bibitem
51953 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51955 name "Documentation"
51956 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51961 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51967 \begin_inset Index idx
51970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51972 packages ! refstyle
51978 \begin_inset Newline newline
51982 \begin_inset Flex URL
51985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51987 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51995 \begin_layout Bibliography
51996 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51997 LatexCommand bibitem
52004 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52007 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52012 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52014 \begin_inset Newline newline
52018 \begin_inset Flex URL
52021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52023 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
52031 \begin_layout Bibliography
52032 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52033 LatexCommand bibitem
52040 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52043 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
52048 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52050 \begin_inset Newline newline
52054 \begin_inset Flex URL
52057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52059 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
52067 \begin_layout Bibliography
52068 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52069 LatexCommand bibitem
52076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52079 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
52084 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52085 for Cyrillic languages:
52086 \begin_inset Newline newline
52090 \begin_inset Flex URL
52093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52095 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
52103 \begin_layout Bibliography
52104 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52105 LatexCommand bibitem
52112 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52115 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
52120 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52122 \begin_inset Newline newline
52126 \begin_inset Flex URL
52129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52131 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
52139 \begin_layout Bibliography
52140 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52141 LatexCommand bibitem
52148 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52151 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
52156 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52158 \begin_inset Newline newline
52162 \begin_inset Flex URL
52165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52167 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
52175 \begin_layout Bibliography
52176 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52177 LatexCommand bibitem
52184 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52187 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
52192 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52194 \begin_inset Newline newline
52198 \begin_inset Flex URL
52201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52203 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
52211 \begin_layout Standard
52212 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52246 \begin_inset Note Note
52249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52256 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52257 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52258 bibliography is the second one:
52266 \begin_layout Standard
52267 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
52268 LatexCommand bibtex
52269 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
52270 options "biblio/alphadin"
52277 \begin_layout Standard
52278 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52282 \begin_layout Standard
52286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52292 pagedeclaration}[1]{
52295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52301 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
52309 \begin_inset Note Note
52312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52313 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
52314 \begin_inset space ~
52318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52320 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
52332 \begin_layout Standard
52333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
52334 LatexCommand printnomenclature
52340 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
52341 LatexCommand printindex